2024 GLADIATOR
OWNER’S MANUAL
First Edition
24_JT_OM_EN_USC
©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD THE MOST
UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S
MANUAL, RADIO AND
WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
Canada
U.S.
mopar.com/om
The Jeep app puts the latest in connectivity and convenience in the palm of your hand. The App provides access to your remote vehicle commands
(if properly equipped), service history, My Garage and the Digital Glovebox. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store
and enter the search keyword “Jeep” (U.S. residents only).
2024 GLADIATOR
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices,
such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 or by
contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement
kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink
and then drive.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and
equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also
include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described
in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make
changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to
its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products
previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed
to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of
your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals
and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
Vehicle images are for illustration purposes only. Actual products sold may vary.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE. CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT
CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM
(CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance,
Lockout Service and Towing Service
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The
Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION........................................................................... 7 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE.................................................. 15 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .................................. 98 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING .......................................................... 115 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ........................................................................... 166 5
6 SAFETY ................................................................................. 185 6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ............................................................ 230 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .................................................... 247 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 293 9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE............................................................. 298
10
11 INDEX ................................................................................... 303
11
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY ....................... 8
ROLLOVER WARNING ..................8
CAMPERS .........................9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .......9
SYMBOL GLOSSARY ................... 9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ........................... 15
KeyFob .......................15
SENTRY KEY ....................... 17
IGNITION SWITCH ....................17
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition ........... 17
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ............ 19
How To Use Remote Start .............19
To Exit Remote Start Mode ............ 19
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped ..................... 20
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . 20
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped .............. 20
Remote Start Cancel Message ..........20
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....20
To Arm The System ................ 21
To Disarm The System ............... 21
Rearming Of The System .............. 21
Security System Manual Override ......... 21
DOORS .......................... 21
Manual Door Locks ................. 21
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ......... 22
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
(If Equipped) .................... 22
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped .......24
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors .....................24
Front Door Removal ................ 24
Rear Door Removal ................ 28
Door Off Mirror Kit — If Equipped ........ 29
Half-Doors — If Equipped .............31
STEERING WHEEL ................... 36
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ........ 36
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 36
SEATS ..........................37
Power Adjustment Front Seats — If Equipped . . 37
Manual Adjustment Front Seats — If Equipped . 38
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat .......... 39
Rear Seat Stadium Position ...........40
Heated Seats — If Equipped ........... 41
Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped ......... 41
Head Restraints .................. 42
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ........... 43
Introducing Voice Recognition .......... 43
Basic Voice Commands .............. 43
Get Started .....................43
Additional Information ...............43
MIRRORS ........................44
InsideRearviewMirror ............... 44
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ............. 44
Outside Mirrors ................... 44
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ........... 45
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal — If Equipped . 45
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .......... 45
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED .............45
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . 46
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ......46
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-Rolling Code Device ..............46
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ........................ 46
Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Device ........................ 47
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button . . 47
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .....47
Security .......................
48
Troubleshooting Tips ................ 48
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...................48
Headlight Switch .................. 48
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped . 49
High/Low Beam Switch .............. 49
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped ..................... 49
Flash-To-Pass .................... 50
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ....... 50
Lights-On Reminder ................ 50
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .......... 50
Turn Signals ..................... 50
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ........ 50
Bed Lights — If Equipped ............. 51
INTERIOR LIGHTS ....................51
Interior Courtesy Lights ..............51
Dimmer Control ..................51
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........ 52
Windshield Wiper Operation ............ 52
2
CLIMATE CONTROLS .................. 53
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ...................... 53
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ...................... 55
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped ..................... 56
Climate Voice Commands .............57
Operating Tips ................... 57
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ........ 58
Storage ....................... 58
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped ........60
AUX/USB Control .................. 60
Jeep® Wireless Speaker — If Equipped ..... 61
Power Outlets ................... 65
Power Inverters — If Equipped .......... 66
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ......... 67
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED ..........68
Auto-Down Feature ................68
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . . 69
Window Lockout Switch .............. 69
WindBuffeting ...................69
GLADIATOR TOPS ....................69
ProvidedTools ................... 69
LoweringTheSoftTop ...............70
RaisingTheSoftTop ................ 76
RemovingTheSoftTop ..............78
Installing The Soft Top ...............79
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal .........80
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Installation ....... 83
RemovingTheHardTop .............. 83
Installing The Hard Top .............. 85
Sunrider® For Hard Top — If Equipped ..... 85
DOOR FRAME — IF EQUIPPED WITH A SOFT TOP . . 87
Door Frame Removal ................ 87
Door Frame Installation ..............88
FOLDING WINDSHIELD ................. 89
Lowering The Windshield .............89
Raising The Windshield .............. 91
HOOD ........................... 91
Opening The Hood .................91
Closing The Hood ..................92
TAILGATE.........................92
Opening .......................92
Three-Position Tailgate ..............92
Closing ........................ 93
BED RAIL TIE DOWN SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .... 94
TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED ...........94
Tonneau Cover Installation ............ 94
Tonneau Cover Removal .............96
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ........ 97
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS ................98
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ......... 100
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ..........100
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls ...................... 100
Oil Life Reset — If Equipped ...........101
Off Road+ Display — If Equipped ........ 101
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items . 102
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .... 102
Battery Saver On, Battery Saver Mode Message,
And Electrical Load Reduction Actions
(If Equipped) ...................104
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ......... 105
Red Warning Lights ................ 105
Yellow Warning Lights .............. 108
Yellow Indicator Lights ..............110
Green Indicator Lights ..............111
White Indicator Lights ..............112
Blue Indicator Lights ...............113
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .....113
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ...................114
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS.......................114
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ................115
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ......115
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....115
Normal Starting ..................115
AutoPark ...................... 116
Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............117
Extended Park Starting ..............117
If Engine Fails To Start .............. 117
After Starting ...................117
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ......118
PARKING BRAKE ...................118
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED .....119
Shifting ....................... 119
Downshifting ................... 120
3
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ....121
IgnitionParkInterlock .............. 122
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ...................... 122
8–Speed Automatic Transmission .......122
Gear Ranges ................... 123
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ..........125
Four-Position Transfer Case — If Equipped . . 125
Five-Position Transfer Case — If Equipped . . . 127
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped ........ 129
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Front And Rear —
If Equipped .................... 129
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Rear Only — If Equipped . . 129
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect —
If Equipped .................... 130
OFF ROAD+ — If Equipped ............131
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING ..... 131
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(IF EQUIPPED) ..................... 132
AutostopMode .................. 132
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop ...................... 133
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . 133
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . 133
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . 133
System Malfunction ............... 133
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)............134
AutostopMode .................. 134
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop ...................... 134
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . 135
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . 135
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . 135
System Malfunction ............... 135
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED .... 135
Cruise Control .................. 136
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ..........137
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...............144
ParkSense Sensors ................144
ParkSense Warning Display ...........144
ParkSense Display ................144
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ....... 147
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . 147
Cleaning The ParkSense System ........ 147
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ..... 147
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........ 148
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ......... 150
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...............150
Fuel Filler Cap .................. 150
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ......... 151
VEHICLE LOADING ................... 151
Certification Label ................ 151
TRAILER TOWING ................... 152
CommonTowingDefinitions ........... 152
Trailer Hitch Classification ............ 154
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS
(MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS) .... 155
Trailer And Tongue Weight ............ 155
Towing Requirements .............. 155
TowingTips .................... 157
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) ............... 158
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . 158
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models ....................... 158
DRIVING TIPS ..................... 159
On-RoadDrivingTips ...............159
Off-RoadDrivingTips ............... 160
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .................166
CYBERSECURITY ...................166
UCONNECT SETTINGS .................166
Customer Programmable Features ....... 166
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED ...................... 179
Radio Operation .................. 179
MediaMode .................... 179
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .....179
Regulatory And Safety Information .......179
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED .......... 179
Vehicle Dynamics ................ 180
Accessory Gauge ................. 180
Pitch&Roll ....................180
TrailCam — If Equipped .............. 180
Trail Recording — If Equipped ..........181
ADVENTURE GUIDES — IF EQUIPPED ........ 182
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES...................185
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........185
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) ....... 185
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System .... 186
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ............ 191
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . 191
4
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped .............194
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . 197
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .......... 200
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ..... 200
Important Safety Precautions .......... 201
Seat Belt Systems ................ 201
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ....207
Child Restraints .................. 218
SAFETY TIPS ......................226
Transporting Passengers ............. 226
Transporting Pets ................. 227
Connected Vehicles ................ 227
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
TheVehicle .................... 227
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ............... 228
Exhaust Gas .................... 228
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........... 229
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........230
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....230
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........... 233
Preparations For Jacking ............ 233
Jack Location ...................233
Spare Tire Location And Removal ....... 235
Jacking Instructions ............... 236
To Stow The Flat Or Spare ............238
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools ......... 239
JUMP STARTING .................... 240
Preparations For Jump Start ........... 240
Jump Starting Procedure ............. 241
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............242
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — IF EQUIPPED ..... 242
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............. 243
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ........... 244
Four–Wheel Drive Models ............ 245
Without The Key Fob ...............245
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ..... 245
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .........................246
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ........... 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ............... 247
Maintenance Plan ................. 247
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............... 250
3.6L Engine .................... 250
Checking Oil Level ................ 251
Adding Washer Fluid ............... 251
Maintenance-Free Battery ............ 251
Pressure Washing ................ 252
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ...............252
Engine Oil .....................252
Engine Oil Filter ..................253
Engine Air Cleaner, Filter ............ 253
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ........ 254
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......... 254
Body Lubrication ................. 256
Windshield Wiper Blades ............ 256
Exhaust System ................. 257
Cooling System .................. 258
Brake System ................... 260
Front/Rear Axle Fluid .............. 261
Transfer Case ...................261
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ......261
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ..... 261
Fuses .......................262
Bulb Replacement ................ 270
TIRES .......................... 273
TireSafetyInformation .............273
Tires — General Information ........... 279
Tire Types ..................... 282
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............282
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........... 283
Snow Traction Devices .............. 284
Tire Rotation Recommendations ........ 285
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ................285
Treadwear ..................... 286
Traction Grades .................. 286
Temperature Grades ............... 286
STORING THE VEHICLE ................ 286
BODYWORK....................... 287
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ...... 287
Body And Underbody Maintenance ....... 288
Preserving The Bodywork ............288
INTERIORS ....................... 289
Carpet Safety Information ............289
CarpetRemoval ................. 290
Seats And Fabric Parts .............. 291
Plastic And Coated Parts ............. 292
Leather Surfaces ................. 292
Glass Surfaces ..................292
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ......293
BRAKE SYSTEM .................... 293
5
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . 293
Torque Specifications ............... 293
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ................ 294
3.6L Engine .................... 294
Reformulated Gasoline ............. 294
Materials Added To Fuel .............294
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........... 294
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . 294
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) And Liquid
Propane (LP) Fuel System Modifications . . . 295
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) In Gasoline ................295
Fuel System Cautions .............. 295
FLUID CAPACITIES ................... 296
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ......... 296
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ........ 297
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ..................... 298
Prepare For The Appointment .......... 298
Prepare A List ................... 298
Be Reasonable With Requests .........298
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............. 298
Roadside Assistance ............... 298
FCA US LLC Customer Center .......... 299
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .......299
Mexico ....................... 299
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ....... 299
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ........... 299
Service Contract .................300
WARRANTY INFORMATION ..............300
MOPAR®PARTS ...................300
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............ 300
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . 300
In Canada ..................... 301
ORDERING AND ACCESSING OWNER’S
INFORMATION ..................... 301
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS ...... 301
GENERAL INFORMATION ............... 302
6
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many
passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road
use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different
road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natu-
ral laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control or a collision. Refer to
page 159 for further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents located online. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well
as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time.
Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you
should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information,
that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle
in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for
technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
7
1
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNING! These statements apply to operating pro-
cedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION! These statements apply to procedures
that could result in damage to your
vehicle.
NOTE: A suggestion which will improve installa-
tion, operation, and reliability. If not fol-
lowed, may result in damage.
TIP: General ideas/solutions/suggestions on
easier use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional infor-
mation on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many pas-
senger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applica-
tions. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other
vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that
can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe
or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-
nificantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
Rollover Warning Label
8 INTRODUCTION
CAMPERS
This vehicle is NOT recommended for slide-in camper applications.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthi-
ness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when oper-
ating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
page 105.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
page 105
Brake Warning Light
page 106
Red Warning Lights
Battery Charge Warning Light
page 106
Door Open Warning Light
page 106
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
page 106
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
page 106
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
page 107
Hood Open Warning Light
page 107
INTRODUCTION 9
1
Red Warning Lights
Oil Pressure Warning Light
page 107
Oil Temperature Warning Light
page 107
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
page 107
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
page 107
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
page 107
Vehicle Security Warning Light
page 108
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
page 108
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
page 108
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
page 108
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
page 108
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
page 109
Low Fuel Warning Light
page 109
10 INTRODUCTION
Yellow Warning Lights
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
page 109
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
page 109
Service 4WD Warning Light
page 109
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light
page 109
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
page 109
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
page 109
Yellow Warning Lights
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
page 110
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
page 110
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
page 110
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Indicator Light
page 110
4WD Low Indicator Light
page 111
4WD Part Time Indicator Light
page 111
INTRODUCTION 11
1
Yellow Indicator Lights
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
page 111
Cargo Light On Indicator Light
page 111
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
page 111
Forward Collision Warning OFF Indicator Light
page 111
Gear Shift Indicator Light
page 111
Neutral Indicator Light
page 111
Yellow Indicator Lights
Off Road+ Indicator Light
page 111
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
page 111
Sway Bar Indicator Light
page 111
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator
Light
page 111
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light
page 112
4WD Auto Indicator Light
page 111
12 INTRODUCTION
Green Indicator Lights
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
page 112
Front Fog Indicator Light
page 112
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
page 112
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
page 112
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
page 112
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light
page 112
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
page 112
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
page 112
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Indicator Light
page 112
Two-Wheel Drive High Indicator Light
page 112
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light
page 113
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light
page 113
INTRODUCTION 13
1
White Indicator Lights
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light
page 113
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
page 113
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
page 113
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
page 113
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) Indicator Light
page 113
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
page 113
14 INTRODUCTION
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and Remote Start
(if equipped). The key fob allows you to lock or unlock
the doors and tailgate from distances up to approxi-
mately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The key
fob also contains a mechanical key.
NOTE:
•
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or
other electronic device. This may result in poor
performance.
•
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, and the
vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE com-
mands are disabled.
WARNING!
Push the Mechanical Key Release Button only with
the key fob facing away from your body, especially
your eyes and objects that may be damaged, such as
clothing.
CAUTION!
The electrical components inside of the key fob may
be damaged if the key fob is subjected to strong elec-
trical shocks. In order to ensure complete effective-
ness of the electronic devices inside of the key fob,
avoid exposing the key fob to direct sunlight.
NOTE:
•
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low key fob battery condition
may be indicated by a message in the instrument
cluster display, or by the LED light on the key fob. If
the LED key fob light no longer illuminates from key
fob button pushes, then the key fob battery requires
replacement.
•
Improper disposal of key fob batteries may be harm-
ful to the environment. Please see an authorized
dealer for proper battery disposal
page 302.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all the
doors. To lock all the doors, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
and the illuminated entry system will be activated.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash
and the horn will chirp.
NOTE:
•
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button through Uconnect Set-
tings
page 166.
•
The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or
unlock the doors, tailgate, glove compartment, stor-
age compartments (if equipped), and rear
seatbacks.
Key Fob
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
2 — LED Indicator
3 — Unlock Button
4 — Lock Button
5 — Remote Start Button (If Equipped)
6 — Panic Button
15
2
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
•
The doors have to be open and then closed in order
for the vehicle to detect a key fob. The Key Left
Vehicle feature will activate when the first door is
closed and no key fob is detected in the vehicle. If
the warning has been activated, and the other doors
are closed, no other warnings will be issued.
•
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside, or the key fob’s wireless signals are blocked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is CR2450.
NOTE:
•
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
battery dimensions.
•
Perchlorate material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed circuit board.
•
When a key fob battery is low, a warning will be indi-
cated on the vehicle’s instrument cluster, and the
fob LED will no longer illuminate with a button push.
1. Remove the back cover of the key fob by inserting a
flat-blade screwdriver into the slot on the bottom of
the fob. Apply light pressure until the cover unsnaps
being careful not to damage the seal. Proceed coun-
terclockwise (in the order shown in the following
image) to loosen the remaining snaps until the bat-
tery cover can be removed.
2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a small
flat-blade screwdriver into the battery removal slot
and sliding the battery forward and upward being
careful not to damage the electronic board
underneath.
3. Install the new battery into the key fob, making sure
the positive (+) side is facing up. Slide the battery
until it is seated securely below the tabs.
4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it is prop-
erly aligned before snapping it back in place.
WARNING!
•
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
•
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
•
Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close
securely, stop using the product and keep it away
from children.
1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points
Battery Replacement
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming And Requesting
Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
•
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be repurposed and reprogrammed to another
vehicle.
•
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
•
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
•
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
•
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The sys-
tem does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is
locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unau-
thorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that
are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds
for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb
check, it indicates that there is a problem with the elec-
tronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to
start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the event
that a valid key fob is used to start the engine but there
is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine will
start and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than ten
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the elec-
tronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as
soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use
of these systems may result in vehicle starting prob-
lems and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
page 302.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also consid-
ered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a START/STOP ignition button as
long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in posi-
tion. These modes are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
1 — OFF
2—ACC
3—RUN
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
•
The engine is stopped.
•
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm,
etc.) are available.
ACC
•
Engine is not started.
•
Some electrical devices are available (power win-
dows, etc.).
RUN
•
Driving position.
•
All electrical devices are available.
START
•
The engine will start.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of the START/STOP ignition button, the key fob
may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a
backup method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side with the
mechanical flip key) against the START/STOP ignition
button and push to operate the ignition switch.
CAUTION!
•
Do not press the mechanical key against the
START/STOP ignition button.
•
Do not use sharp metal objects (e.g. screwdriver
etc.) to pry the button out of the ignition switch.
This button comes as an assembly, and is not
removable. This can damage the silicone shield.
WARNING!
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
When opening the driver's door with the ignition in the
ON/RUN (engine not running) position, a chime will
sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF
position. In addition to the chime, the message will dis-
play “Ignition Or Accessory On” in the cluster.
Backup Starting Method
Do Not Use Mechanical Key
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system
has a range of 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambi-
ent conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range
page 302.
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon mon-
oxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors and
tailgate will lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and
the horn will chirp twice (if equipped). Pushing the
Remote Start button again will shut the engine off.
NOTE:
•
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
•
Remote Start can only be used twice.
•
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
•
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
•
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Gear selector in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
Panic button not pushed
•
System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
•
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
•
Ignition in OFF position
•
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
•
All removable doors must not be removed
•
Malfunction Indicator Light not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start sys-
tem, either push and release the unlock button on the
key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security system
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute
cycle, push and release the START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or
if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute
cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the climate controls will resume previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
•
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
— Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instru-
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP
ignition button.
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or
less. The time is dependent on the ambient tempera-
ture. Once the timer expires, the system will automati-
cally adjust the settings depending on ambient condi-
tions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT
SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather condi-
tions. The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
feature will also turn on if programmed in the Comfort
menu screen within Uconnect Settings
page 166.
In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when Remote Start is activated, if
programmed in the Comfort menu screen. The vehicle
will adjust the climate control settings depending on
the outside ambient temperature.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a rear climate system, it
will remain off to allow for optimal front row
performance.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on
the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
•
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the climate settings will default to maximum heat,
with fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost
timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix mode.
•
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based on
the last settings selected by the driver.
•
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above,
the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level
mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
page 53.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change, and exit the automatic defaults, if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote
Start mode. This includes turning the climate controls
off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD
WIPER DE-ICER ACTIVATION —
IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer
and operation will continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the instru-
ment cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
Remote Start prematurely:
•
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
•
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
•
Remote Start Canceled — Tailgate Open
•
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
•
Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
•
Remote Start Canceled — System Fault
•
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active
until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. When the system is activated, the
interior switches for door locks are disabled. The
Vehicle Security system provides both audible and vis-
ible signals. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
Security system will provide the following audible and
visible signals: the horn will pulse, the parking lights
and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security
Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
○
Push the lock button on the interior power door
lock switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
○
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob available
in the same exterior zone
page 22.
○
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
•
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
•
Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if equipped)
page 22.
•
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
NOTE:
•
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm
the Vehicle Security system.
•
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the inte-
rior power door lock switches will not unlock the
doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken
to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the
horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds
between cycles and up to eight cycles if the trigger
remains active) and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL
OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the removable door
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type door
lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle,
push the rocker lever forward to the lock position and
close the door. To unlock the door, push the rocker lever
rearward.
NOTE:
The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or unlock
the door cylinders, tailgate, glove compartment, and
storage compartments (if equipped).
WARNING!
•
For personal security reasons and safety in a colli-
sion, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well
as when you park and exit the vehicle.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always place the ignition
in the OFF position and remove the key from the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause severe personal injuries and death.
(Continued)
Manual Door Lock
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
POWER DOOR LOCKS —
IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switch is located on each front
door panel. Push the switch forward to unlock the
doors, and rearward to lock the doors.
WARNING!
•
For personal security reasons and safety in a colli-
sion, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well
as when you park and exit the vehicle.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always place the ignition
in the OFF position and remove the key from the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause severe personal injuries and death.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ —
PASSIVE ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
The Passive Entry system is a feature
that allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) and tailgate without
having to push the key fob lock or
unlock buttons.
NOTE:
•
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
Uconnect Settings
page 166.
•
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Pas-
sive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop, or other electronic device; these
devices may interfere with the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the Passive Entry system from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
•
Passive Entry Unlock initiates Headlight Illumination
On Approach (low beams, license plate lamp, park-
ing lights) for whichever duration is set within the
Uconnect Settings between 0, 30, 60 or 90 sec-
onds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two flashes
of the turn signal lights.
•
If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
•
The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
handle.
•
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and, if equipped, will arm the Vehicle Security
system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle.
Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver
door automatically. Grabbing the passenger door
handle will unlock all doors and the tailgate
automatically.
Power Door Lock Switch
Scan me
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
page 166.
•
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function only if the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
•
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key
fob while a door is open.
•
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
•
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are closed, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the
vehicle will unlock and alert the customer. If Passive
Entry is disabled using the Uconnect system, the key
fob protection described in this section remains
active/functional.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a FOBIK-
Safe operation when a valid Passive Entry key fob is
detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
•
A second valid Passive Entry key fob is detected out-
side of the vehicle (within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive
Entry door handle).
•
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
•
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using
the door panel switch, and then the doors are
closed.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock
the vehicle doors.
NOTE:
When pushing the door handle lock button, DO NOT
grab the door handle. This could unlock the door(s).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
NOTE:
•
After pushing the door handle button, the driver
must wait three seconds before locking or unlocking
the doors, using any Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow the driver to check if the vehicle is
locked by pulling the door handle without the
vehicle unlocking.
•
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect sys-
tem, the key fob protection described in “Preventing
Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob In
Vehicle” remains active/functional.
•
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is depleted
page 302.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic Door Lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h). The Automatic Door Lock feature can be
enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written
request of the customer. Please see an authorized
dealer for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
SYSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, temporarily
remove the sealing plug for access, and use a flat-blade
screwdriver (or mechanical key) to rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position.
NOTE:
•
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle, even though the inside door
lock is in the unlocked position.
•
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the unlocked position.
•
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the locked position.
•
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the lock lever rearward (located on the door trim
panel), lower the window and open the door with the
outside door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged (locked).
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors
from inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the
vehicle, be sure to check that there is no one left
inside.
FRONT DOOR REMOVAL
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection they
can provide. This procedure is furnished for use dur-
ing off-road operation only. Failure to follow this
warning can result in death or serious personal injury.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
Scan me
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. For information on
off-road driving tips, see
page 160.
•
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle,
as they may cause personal injury in the event of
an accident.
•
Assistance to remove doors may by required due to
the weight of the door to avoid personal injury.
CAUTION!
•
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88 ft·lb/8N·m).Forinfor-
mation on off-road driving tips, see
page 160.
•
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors. If
you choose to remove the doors, see an authorized
dealer for a replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror.
Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for
on-road use.
NOTE:
When front doors are removed, the message “Blind
Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable” will display in the
instrument cluster display. Power Mirrors and Power
Door Locks will also be unavailable.
To remove the front doors, proceed as follows:
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin nut from the upper and lower
outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin nuts can be stowed in the Fastener
Bin located under the rear seat.
3. Remove the plastic wiring access door under the
instrument panel by sliding the plastic panel along
the door frame toward the seats until the tabs are
detached.
NOTE:
Do not force open; this will break the plastic cover.
4. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the wiring
harness.
Door Removal Warning Label
Hinge Pin Nut
Wiring Access Door
Closed Wiring Harness
1 — Red Locking Tab
2 — Wiring Harness Lever (Closed Position)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
5. Push and hold down the black security tab under
the wiring harness, and lift the harness lever into
the open position.
6. With the wiring harness open, pull straight down-
ward on the wiring connector to unplug. Store the
wiring connector in the lower door basket.
7. With the door in the open position, remove the
check screw from the door check attachment on the
body side (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
Keep the check arm in the extended position for
easier reinstallation. See note below if the check
arm gets pushed into the door while the door is off.
8. With the door open, lift the door with the help of
another person, to clear the hinge pins from their
hinges and remove the door.
To Install The Front Doors
1. Locate the upper and lower hinge pins on the door,
and lower them into the body hinges on the vehicle.
NOTE:
The upper hinge pin is longer, which can be used to
assist in guiding the door into place during
installation.
2. With the door in the open position, align the door
check bracket with the hole on the body. Insert the
check screw and tighten using a #40 Torx head
driver to 19.9 ft· lb (27.0 N·m).
3. Insert the upper and lower hinge pin screws into the
body hinges. Tighten the screws using a #T50 Torx
head driver to 3.8 ft· lb / 5.2 N·m.
NOTE:
If the check arm is stuck inside the door, follow these
instructions to install the check arm.
1. Insert the check arm screw into the check arm
bracket. Ensure the screw is in the correct
orientation.
2. Slowly pull on the screw to draw the check arm out
until you encounter increased resistance. Do not
attempt to pull the check arm all the way out.
3. While sitting inside the vehicle, hold the door par-
tially closed and insert the screw into the hole on
the body.
Open Wiring Harness
1 — Wiring Harness Lever (Open Position)
2 — Black Security Tab
Door Check Arm Hinge Pin Locations
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Using your fingers, turn the screw clockwise at least
two full turns. Gently pull on the screw to ensure it is
secure.
5. Using the door handle, slowly push the door open.
The check arm will be pulled out of the door. You
may hear the check arm pop against the screw.
6. Fully tighten the screw as instructed.
WARNING!
To avoid personal injury be sure to keep your arms,
hands, fingers and all objects clear of the check arm
area during the removal and installation procedures.
CAUTION!
•
Do not close the door before reattaching the door
check to the body. Damage may occur to the door
check.
•
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners, damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
•
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
install (Max Torque: 6.0 ft· lb/8.1 N·m).
Replacing The Wiring Connector Into The Wiring
Harness
To reinstall the wiring connector on the vehicle’s door
into the harness just inside the vehicle, proceed as
follows:
NOTE:
Make sure there is plenty of slack on the wiring connec-
tor during installation. Close the door slightly to provide
more slack if needed.
1. With light finger pressure, seat the wiring connector
straight into the wiring harness until the wiring har-
ness lever starts to lower with the latching pin.
CAUTION!
Failure to correctly reconnect the wiring connector
into the harness will result in damage that is not cov-
ered by the New Vehicle Warranty.
2. After the harness lever has started to move with the
pressure of seating the wiring connector, continue
by lowering the wiring harness lever to the fully
closed position.
3. Push the red locking tab downward to lock into
place.
4. Attach the cloth strap of the door onto the metal
hook just inside the vehicle.
5. Replace wiring access doors.
Connecting The Wiring Harness
1 — Seat Connector Straight Into Harness
2 — Wiring Harness Lever Starts To Lower
Fully Closed Position
Cloth Strap Attachment
1 — Metal Hook
2 — Cloth Strap
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
NOTE:
When reinstalling the door check arm attachment
screw, screw torque should be between 11.76 ft·lb /
16 N·m and 27.9 ft·lb / 38 N·m.
REAR DOOR REMOVAL
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection they
can provide. This procedure is furnished for use dur-
ing off-road operation only. Failure to follow this
warning can result in death or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
•
All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. For information on
off-road driving tips, see
page 160.
•
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle,
as they may cause personal injury in the event of
an accident.
•
Assistance to remove doors may by required due to
the weight of the door to avoid personal injury.
CAUTION!
•
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88 ft·lb/8N·m).Forinfor-
mation on off-road driving tips, see
page 160.
•
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
To remove the rear doors, proceed as follows:
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin nuts from the upper and
lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head
driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin nuts can be stowed in the Fastener
Bin under the rear seat.
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
4. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring access door
from the bottom of the B-pillar.
5. Unplug the wiring connector.
Scan me
Door Removal Warning Label
Hinge Pin Nut
Wiring Access Door
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring harness.
This will unlock the connector tab, allowing the wir-
ing connector to be unplugged. Unhook the wire
harness strap from the hook on the body side. Store
the wire connector in the lower basket of the door.
6. With the door in the open position, remove the
check bolt from the door check attachment on the
body (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
Keep the check arm in the extended position for
easier reinstallation.
7. With the door open, lift the door with the help of
another person, to clear the hinge pins from their
hinges and remove the door.
WARNING!
To avoid personal injury be sure to keep your arms,
hands, fingers and all objects clear of the check arm
area during the removal and installation procedures.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in
the reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used to
assist in guiding the door into place when reinstalling.
CAUTION!
•
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88 ft·lb/8N·m).Forinfor-
mation on off-road driving tips, see
page 160.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
DOOR OFF MIRROR KIT —
IF EQUIPPED
If equipped with the Door Off Mirror Kit, exterior rear-
view mirrors can be installed on to the upper body door
hinges after the front doors have been removed.
WARNING!
•
All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. For off-road driving
tips, see
page 160.
•
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle,
as they may fly around and cause personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop, rough ter-
rain, or a collision.
Wiring Connector
Door Check Arm
Door Off Mirror
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
To install the Door Off Mirrors, proceed as follows:
1. Remove both front doors
page 24.
2. Remove the cowl bolt closest to the door opening
using a #40 Torx head driver, and store in a safe
location.
3. Push the mirror bracket forward onto the A-pillar,
making sure to align the bottom of the bracket with
the upper door hinge, and the hole from the
removed cowl bolt.
4. Place the bracket bushing behind the mirror bracket
(over the cowl bolt hole), then insert the bracket bolt
into the mirror bracket, through the bracket bushing.
5. Insert the hinge shoulder bolt through the bottom of
the upper door hinge up into the mirror bracket,
then rotate the bracket knob toward the rear of the
vehicle to secure the mirror bracket to the A-pillar.
6. Tighten both the bracket bolt and the hinge shoul-
der bolt with a #40 Torx head driver. Recommended
torque specification for the bracket bolt is 6 ft-lb
(8 N·m), and 7.5 ft-lb (10 N·m) for the hinge shoulder
bolt.
7. Lower the mirror assembly onto the mirror bracket.
Cowl Bolt Location
Push Bracket Onto A-pillar
Attaching Mirror Bracket To The Vehicle
1 — Bracket Bushing
2 — Bracket Bolt
Attaching Mirror Bracket To The Vehicle
1 — Bracket Knob
2 — Hinge Shoulder Bolt
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
8. Insert the three mirror screws into the mirror assem-
bly, and tighten into the mirror bracket using a
#30 Torx head driver. Recommended torque specifi-
cation for the mirror screws is 4 ft-lb (5.5 N·m).
9. Repeat the steps on the other side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
If this kit is being installed with the optional lamp
bracket, the bracket bushing from step 4 is not needed.
Use the spacer from the lamp bracket.
HALF-DOORS — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
•
Do not run half-doors through an automatic car
wash. This may result in scratches and wax
buildup on the windows.
•
Careless handling and storage of the half-doors
may damage the seals resulting in water leaks into
the interior of the vehicle.
•
The upper half-doors must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water leaks into the interior of the vehicle.
•
Store the zipper pulls of the upper half-door win-
dows at the upper B-pillar area for both front and
rear doors to avoid damage to the windows when
not in use.
•
Do not attempt to operate the half-door zipper in
temperatures of 41°F (5°C) or below. Damage to
the window may occur.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
This vehicle may be equipped with half-
doors. To install the half-doors in the
vehicle, follow the instruction sheet
packaged in the box the doors were
received in. Replacement parts may be
purchased through Mopar® Service.
Half-Door Installation
To install the front or rear half-doors, proceed as
follows:
1. Remove the full doors from the vehicle. For front
door removal, see
page 24. For rear door
removal, see
page 28.
2. Locate the upper and lower hinge pins on the lower
half-door, and lower them into the body hinges on
the vehicle.
NOTE:
The upper hinge pin is longer, which can be used to
assist in guiding the door into place during
installation.
3. Insert the upper and lower hinge pin screws into the
body hinges. Tighten the screws using a #T50 Torx
head driver to 3.8 ft· lb / 5.2 N·m.
Lower Mirror Assembly Onto Bracket
Mirror Screw Locations
Scan me
Lower Half-Door Hinge Pins
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
CAUTION!
•
Do not close the door before reattaching the door
check to the body. Damage may occur to the door
check.
•
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners, damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
•
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
install (Max Torque: 6.0 ft· lb/8.1 N·m).
4. Attach the cloth strap of the lower half-door to the
metal hook just inside the vehicle.
5. Connect the wiring harness on the lower half-door to
the connection just inside the vehicle.
NOTE:
For front doors, make sure the wiring harness is
closed completely.
6. Replace wiring access doors.
7. When the half-doors are shipped with the vehicle,
the lower half-doors will have plugs in the post holes
that must be removed prior to upper half-door instal-
lation. To remove these plugs, proceed as follows:
a. Locate the service hole in the center of each
plug of the lower half-door (two on each front and
rear door).
b. Place a tool (hook tool or trim stick is recom-
mended) in the service hole.
c. Using the tool, slowly pull upwards from the cen-
ter of the plug to remove.
8. Making sure the window on the upper half-door is
completely zipped closed, insert the upper half-door
into the lower half-door by placing the posts into the
post holes.
9. Push down firmly on the inside of the upper half-
door until it is fully seated in the lower half.
Cloth Strap Attachment
1 — Metal Hook
2 — Cloth Strap
Front Door Wiring Harness
1 — Open Wiring Harness
2 — Closed Wiring Harness
Place Tool Into Service Hole Of Plug To Remove
Lower The Upper Half-Door Into Post Holes
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Door Latch Alignment
CAUTION!
Upon first installation of the half-doors, slowly set the
door almost to the closing position and check how
the door latch aligns with the body striker. Touch con-
dition between these components can result in dam-
age to both the door and the striker.
NOTE:
Only adjust the door to fit correctly against the striker.
DO NOT adjust the striker, as this could affect the posi-
tioning of the full door.
If the door does not center align between the latch and
the striker, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen (do not remove) the four bolts on the door
hinges using the provided #T50 Torx head driver.
2. With the bolts loose, hold the door in the almost
closing position, and check that the latch and striker
align.
3. With the latch and striker aligned, proceed to close
the door softly and tighten the hinge bolts to
20.3 ft· lb / 27.5 N·m (Max Torque: 27.3 ft· lb /
37 N·m).
Lower Door Adjustment
CAUTION!
Upon first installation of the half-doors, slowly close
each door to check for body contact. Improper setting
of the door hinges can cause extreme non-uniform
conditions, and result in damage to the body around
the door.
If the door does not latch properly after installation, if
there is interference between the panels, or if a non-
uniform gap around the door is observed when the door
is closed (example: door position appears to be low and
too far rearward), the position of the door on its hinges
may need to be adjusted. To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen (do not remove) the four bolts on the door
hinges using the provided #T50 Torx head driver.
NOTE:
Do not adjust the body mounted hinges, or any part
of the door latch, as modifications to these parts will
affect installation of the full door.
Push Down To Fully Seat Upper Half-Door
Check Door Latch And Striker Alignment
Hinge Bolt Locations
Hinge Bolt Locations
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
2. With the bolts loose, the door can be moved forward
by pushing the door handle toward the front of the
vehicle, and/or upward by grabbing the door handle
and lifting towards the roof.
3. Once the gaps between the door and vehicle body
are uniform around the entire door, tighten the door
hinge bolts to 20.3 ft· lb / 27.5 N·m (Max Torque:
27.3ft·lb/37N·m).
Upper Door Adjustment
After installation of the half-doors, if water leaks or wind
noise is observed, the seal of the upper half-door to the
door opening may need to be adjusted.
To determine if the upper half-door needs to be
adjusted, proceed as follows:
1. Determine which door is affected.
2. Open the affected door and hold a dollar-size piece
of paper along the top of the door opening against
the vehicle near where the leak/noise was
observed. Make sure half of the paper is above the
area where the door seal contacts the door opening,
while the other half is below.
3. Close the door on the paper, then pull the paper
upward. If the paper moves with little to no effort,
the upper half-door will need to be adjusted in that
area to increase seal compression.
There is another optional test that can be performed
using a flashlight and the help of another person.
One person should be inside the vehicle, and move the
flashlight around the periphery of the door seal, shining
outward. The other person should stand outside of the
vehicle and check for light passing by the seal. If light is
seen through the seal area, the door will need to be
adjusted.
To adjust the seal compression, proceed as follows:
1. Open the door and lift the upper half-door up and
away from the lower half. Lay the upper half-door on
a clean, dry surface.
2. Using an 8 mm open-end wrench (not provided),
loosen the nut located inside the bottom of the
upper half-door post, closest to where the “paper
test” detected a gap.
3. Usinga3mmAllenwrench (not provided), rotate
the screw on the side of the post counterclockwise
(while holding the wrench on the loosened bolt) to
increase the seal compression. If needed, rotate
clockwise to reduce seal compression.
Performing A Paper Test Nut Location Inside Bottom Of Post
Rotate Screw For Seal Compression
1—3mmAllenWrench
2—8mmOpen-End Wrench
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Tighten the nut inside the bottom of the post using
the wrench and make sure the screw head is flush
to the post. Reinstall the upper half-door.
5. Close the door and repeat the “paper test”. Repeat
the adjustment procedure if needed.
6. If needed, add the provided shim to a lower half-
door pocket to seal the upper half-door to the roof:
a. Lift upper half-door up and away from lower half.
b. Clean the bottom of the door pocket.
c. Slide the shim onto a pencil or similar tool.
d. Remove the paper backing from the adhesive
side of the shim and place the shim with pencil
into the pocket.
e. Press the shim firmly to the bottom of the pocket,
and remove the pencil once the shim is firmly in
place.
f. Replace upper half-door.
NOTE:
If the compression is increased too much on the front
upper corner of the rear doors, deformation of the seal
will occur.
Half-Door Mirror Installation
To install the front door exterior mirrors on the half-
doors, proceed as follows:
1. Locate the wiring harness on the outside of the front
half-door.
2. Insert the wiring harness firmly into the connection
on the driver’s side exterior mirror.
Screw Head Flush To Post
Remove Upper Half-Door & Clean Bottom Of Door Pocket
Press Shim Firmly Into Bottom Of Pocket
1 — Remove Paper Backing From Shim
2 — Slide Pencil through Hole In Shim
3 — Press Pencil With Shim Into Pocket
Wiring Harness Location
Connect Wiring Harness To Exterior Mirror
1 — Exterior Mirror
2 — Wiring Harness
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
3. Place the base of the exterior mirror into the hole on
the door, and support it while attaching the three
mirror bolts through the inside of the door using a
#T40 Torx head driver.
NOTE:
Recommended torque for the mirror bolts is 5.9 ft· lb
/8.0N·m.
4. Repeat steps 1-3 on the opposite side front door.
Half-Door Removal
To remove the half-doors, repeat the installation steps
in reverse order.
NOTE:
When removing the upper half-doors, push upward
firmly on the middle of the upper half-door until the
posts detach from the lower half.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping con-
trol is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the control down-
ward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position, push
the control upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating ele-
ment that helps warm your hands in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only
one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may
not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located within the
Uconnect system and, if equipped, on the instrument
panel below the radio. You can access the button
through the Climate or Controls menu of the
touchscreen.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element off.
Attach Exterior Mirror
1 — Support Mirror From Outside
2 — Attach Three Mirror Bolts From Inside
Push Upward On Middle Of Upper Half Door To Remove
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Control
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 20.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exer-
cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe-
cially if used for long periods.
•
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steer-
ing wheel covers of any type of material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
POWER ADJUSTMENT FRONT
SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Some models may be equipped with a power driver's
seat and/or power passenger seat. The power seat
switch and power seat recliner switch are located on
the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the
power seat switch to adjust seat height, angle, or
forward/rearward position. Use the power seat recline
switch to adjust the angle of the seatback.
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of the
seat switch and the front of the seat cushion will move
in the direction of the switch.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Recline Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or
Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rear-
ward. Push the power recline switch forward or rear-
ward. The seatback will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lum-
bar support. Pushing upward or downward on the
switch will raise and lower the position of the support.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT FRONT
SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using
a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the
floor. While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located
under the seat cushion and move the seat forward or
rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the
desired position. Then, using body pressure, move for-
ward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by
using the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard
side of the seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the
seat, push downward on the handle to lower the seat.
Several strokes may be necessary to achieve the
desired position.
Power Lumbar Switch
Adjustment Bar Location
Seat Height Adjustment
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seatback Recline
Adjustment
To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and lean
forward or rearward, depending on the direction you
would like the seatback to move. Release the strap
when the desired position is reached and the seatback
will lock into place.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Lumbar Support
The Lumbar Support Control knob is located on the out-
board side of the front driver seat. Rotate the control
forward to increase and rearward to decrease the
desired amount of lumbar support.
60/40 SPLIT FOLDING REAR SEAT
WARNING!
The seatback is not intended to be used for storing
cargo when folded flat, and only folds to allow access
to the cargo area behind the seat. Do not operate the
vehicle with unsecured cargo on the second row
folded seatback.
The 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat can be folded flat to
access the storage area behind the seat. The seat bot-
tom can also be lifted into the Stadium Position to cre-
ate more storage space on the rear floor, and provide
access to the underseat storage bins (if equipped)
page 40.
NOTE:
•
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to
fold down easily.
•
The center head restraints must be in the lowest
position to avoid contact with the center console
when folding the seat.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Folding The Rear Seats
To fold down the rear seat, pull the release strap
located on the upper outboard side of the rear seat to
release the seat. The head restraints are folded inde-
pendently
page 42.
Recline Strap
Lumbar Support Control Knob
Release Strap Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
NOTE:
Each rear seatback can be locked in an upright position
using the vehicle key. Each seatback must be unlocked
to release for folding.
To raise the seatback to the proper position, manually
lift the seatback until it locks into place. To return the
head restraint to the proper position, manually lift up
until it locks into place. If interference from the cargo
area behind the seat prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seats to
their proper position.
NOTE:
•
The vehicle is equipped with stow clips located on
the lower trim, next to the rear seats. Use these
clips to hold the seat belt out of the path of the
seatback when it is being folded and raised.
•
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded
for an extended period of time. This is normal. By
simply unfolding the seats to the open position, the
seat cushion will return to its normal shape over
time.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. Perform a “push - pull - push” check to con-
firm the seat is fully locked. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position, the seat will not provide
the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers.
A red indicator on the pull strap will be displayed if
the seatback is not securely locked. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
REAR SEAT STADIUM POSITION
The rear seat bottoms can be folded upward into the
Stadium Position to create more storage space on the
vehicle’s floor, and to access the under seat storage
bins (if equipped).
To fold the seat bottom upward, proceed as follows:
1. Lift upward on each section of the seat bottom.
Rear Seat Folded Flat
Locking The Seatback
Stow Clip Location
Lift From Beneath Seat (Left Side Shown)
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Raise the seat bottom upward into the Stadium
Position.
To return the seat bottom to the normal position, push
downward on the raised seat bottom.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
The heated seat control buttons are located
on the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen and also in the Climate Control
touchscreen menu.
•
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the MED setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a fourth time to turn
the heating elements off.
NOTE:
•
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
•
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 20.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical condition must exer-
cise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cush-
ion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could
cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
REAR SEAT ARMREST —
IF EQUIPPED
The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a
rear armrest with cupholders. To unfold it, grab the pull
strap under the head restraint and pull it forward.
NOTE:
The cupholder liner can be removed for cleaning.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Stadium Position
Rear Seat Armrest
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
WARNING!
•
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
•
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button located on the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint. The release
button does not need to be pushed to adjust the head
restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go,
then push the adjustment button and the release but-
ton at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and push downward.
Then adjust it to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
•
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
•
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the preceding reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clear-
ance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable, but fold-
able, outboard head restraints, as well as an adjust-
able, removable center head restraint.
To fold down the outboard head restraints, push the
button located on the outboard side of the head
restraint.
To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift
up on the head restraint until it locks into place.
To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the head
restraint. To lower the center head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push down on the head restraint.
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the adjustment button and the
release button at the base of each post while pulling
the head restraint up.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Rear Foldable Outboard Head Restraints
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust it
to the appropriate height using the adjustment button.
For information on child seat tether routing, see
page 200.
NOTE:
Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact with
the center console when folding the seat down.
WARNING!
•
Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head
restraints installed while passengers are occupying
the rear seat. In a collision, people riding in this
area without the head restraints installed are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
•
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the preceding reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE
RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice
Recognition (VR) system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
•
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
•
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
•
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
•
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passen-
ger conversations are examples of noise that may
impact recognition.
•
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead.
•
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button, wait until after the beep, then say your
Voice Command.
•
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2023 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Brand Connect
and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
Brand Connect Radio Inc.
page 302.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit
DriveUconnect.com (US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And Send Or
Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio,
Media, Navigation, And Climate Functions
3 — Push The Hang-up Button To End A Call
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to
the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The
mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position
(toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s rear
view.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the Uconnect Controls button on the
touchscreen.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors and lift the cover.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The Outside Mirrors are located on the front driver and
passenger side doors, and are adjusted manually or by
power adjustment (if equipped).
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the Outside Mir-
ror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a
slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Manual Mirror Adjustment
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Outside Rearview Mirror
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
For information on the Door Off Mirror Kit (if equipped)
when the front doors are removed, see
page 29.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger
side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your pas-
senger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side mirror.
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the door panel
next to the door handle.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to
select the mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the power mirror control switch, push any of the
four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/RUN posi-
tion to adjust the power mirrors.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN
SIGNAL — IF EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
lighting contain LEDs, which are located in the upper
outer corner of each mirror.
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with
the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster
(if equipped)
page 53.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
•
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door open-
ers, motorized gates, lighting, or
home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt
battery.
•
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sun visor designate the three
different HomeLink® channels.
Power Mirror Control Switch
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Scan me
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
•
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons
will activate the devices they are programmed to
with each press of the corresponding HomeLink®
button.
•
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security sys-
tem is active
page 302.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmit-
ter of the device that is being programmed to the
HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held trans-
mitter is programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
CHANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE
A ROLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING
CODE DEVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the
device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device
with a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately visible when
looking at the device. The name and color of the button
may vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate
your garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this pro-
cedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® but-
ton you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indica-
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code
final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code
final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can usu-
ally be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door
opener motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con-
firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If
the garage door opener motor does not operate,
repeat the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly, pro-
gramming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con-
firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If
the garage door opener motor does not operate,
repeat the steps from the beginning.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or
pets are in the path of the door or gate.
•
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or con-
fined area while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon mon-
oxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon mon-
oxide is poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a mis-
cellaneous device follows the same procedure as pro-
gramming to a garage door opener
page 46. Be
sure to determine if the device has a rolling code, or
non-rolling code before beginning the programming
process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner. The pro-
cedure may need to be performed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the
new device you want to program the HomeLink® button
to has a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step
2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
PROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure
while programming HomeLink® with the engine on
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that
the garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may
take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
○
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pushed.
○
To program the two remaining HomeLink® but-
tons, repeat each step for each remaining but-
ton. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-
held transmitter.
•
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener
to complete the training for a rolling code.
•
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener with-
out these safety features.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights
(if equipped), instrument panel lights, instrument panel
light dimming, interior lights, and fog lights (if
equipped).
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Dimmer Control
3 — Push Bed Light
4 — Push Front Fog Light
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the head-
light switch is placed in the parking lights position. How-
ever, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be acti-
vated along with the front and rear marker lights. The
DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake is
engaged.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking lights and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlights, parking lights, and instrument panel light
operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
light position to the first detent to turn on headlights,
parking lights, and instrument panel light. Rotate the
headlight switch to the second detent for the AUTO
position.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
— IF EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) are in a dedicated
position below the headlight assembly. DRLs are active
when the low beams are not on while the vehicle’s
transmission is in any position (automatic transmis-
sion), or when the vehicle begins to move (manual
transmission).
NOTE:
•
For vehicles sold in Canada, the DRLs will automati-
cally deactivate when the front fog lights are turned
on.
•
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that
side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when the haz-
ard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
The High/Low Beam switch is located within the multi-
function lever on the left side of the steering wheel.
High beam headlights can be used for improved visibil-
ity in low lit areas when there is no oncoming traffic.
Otherwise, it is recommended to use the low beam
headlights to reduce glare to other vehicles.
With the headlight switch activated, push the multifunc-
tion lever toward the instrument panel to switch the
headlights to high beams. The lever will return to the
centered position. To return the headlights to low beam,
pull the lever toward the steering wheel, or push the
lever toward the instrument panel.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
HEADLAMP CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by auto-
matically controlling the high beams through the use of
a camera mounted on the vehicle’s header. This cam-
era detects vehicle specific light and automatically
switches from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
•
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto Dim
High Beams” within your Uconnect Settings
page 166, as well as turning the headlight
switch to the AUTO position and placing the multi-
function lever in the high beam position.
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Dimmer Control
3 — Push Bed Light
4 — Push Front Fog Light
Multifunction Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
•
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and tail-
lights of vehicles in the field of view will cause head-
lights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the wind-
shield or camera lens will cause the system to func-
tion improperly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
The Flash-To-Pass feature will illuminate the high beam
headlights temporarily to signal another vehicle of a
passing occurrence. Pull and hold the Multifunction
Lever to activate the Flash-To-Pass feature. When the
lever is released, the Flash-To-Pass feature will
deactivate.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS —
IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic Headlight System will turn the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
last detent for automatic headlight operation. When the
system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also
on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds (programmable through the Uconnect Set-
tings
page 166) after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move
the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, the vehicle will
chime when the driver’s door is opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The Front Fog Lights are located on the front of the
vehicle below the headlights. When activated, these
lights add illumination directed at the driving surface to
aid in poor visibility conditions.
To activate the Front Fog Lights, turn on the parking
lights or low beam headlights and push the fog light
switch. Pushing the fog light switch a second time will
turn the front fog lights off.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Front Fog Light Switch
Front Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
BED LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The bed lights will illuminate the bed and cargo area.
Bed lights are turned on by pushing the bed light switch
located on the lower half of the headlight switch.
A telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster display
when these lights are on. Pushing the switch a second
time will turn the lights off.
The bed lights will turn on for approximately 60 seconds
when a key fob unlock button is pushed, as part of the
Illuminated Entry feature.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The Interior Courtesy Lights will turn on when the front
doors are opened, by rotating the instrument panel dim-
mer control (dial on the right) on the headlight switch
fully upward while the doors are closed, or if equipped,
when the unlock button is pushed on the key fob.
The Interior Courtesy Lights are located in the center of
the vehicle’s sport bar, and consist of one large center
light and four smaller reading lights. Each reading light
can be turned on by pushing the lens. Pushing the lens
a second time will turn the light off.
When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
rotating the instrument panel dimmer control to the
extreme bottom position will cause all the interior lights
to turn off. This allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging the vehi-
cle’s battery.
DIMMER CONTROL
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and
is located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Bed Light Switch
Bed Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
Interior Courtesy Lights
Dimmer Control
Dimmer Control (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights. Rotating the dimmer con-
trol will also adjust the interior and ambient light levels
(e.g. courtesy lights in the footwell, illuminated cuphold-
ers, and front door handles).
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column; it operates the
multiple wiper options. The front wipers are operated by
rotating a switch, located at the end of the lever.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the
second detent past the intermittent settings for high-
speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause
between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever
to the first detent position for one of four intermittent
settings. The delay cycle can be set anywhere between
1 to 18 seconds.
NOTE:
The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the
vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
until desired spray is reached. If the lever is pulled
while in the delay range, the wiper will start and con-
tinue to operate for two or three wipe cycles after the
lever is released. Then, the intermittent interval previ-
ously selected will resume.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for two or three wipe cycles. Then, the wip-
ers will turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the washer will resume normal
operation.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist
Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a single
wipe to clear off-road mist or spray from a passing
vehicle. As long as the lever is held up, the wipers will
continue to operate.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
page 256.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Operation
1 — Pull For Windshield Washer
2 — Rotate For Wiper Operation
3 — Push Up For Mist
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the
radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current set-
ting to the coldest output of air. MAX A/C
sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance. The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX
A/C is on. Performing this function again will cause the
MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the
MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen, or push the button on the faceplate
to change the current setting. The A/C indi-
cator illuminates when A/C is ON.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin.
NOTE:
•
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
•
If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water
spray from the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen, or push the button on the faceplate
to change the system between recirculation
mode and outside air mode. The Recircula-
tion indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be
used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen grayed out) if conditions
exist that could create fogging on the inside of the wind-
shield. The A/C can be deselected manually without
disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use
of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended. Recirculation mode
may automatically adjust to optimize customer experi-
ence for warming, cooling, dehumidification, etc.
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen, or push the button on the faceplate,
to change the current setting. The AUTO indi-
cator illuminates when AUTO is on. This fea-
ture automatically controls the interior cabin tempera-
ture by adjusting distribution and blower speed. Air
conditioning (A/C) may be active during AUTO operation
to improve performance. AUTO Mode is highly recom-
mended for efficiency. Toggling this function will cause
the system to switch between manual mode and auto-
matic mode
page 56.
Front Defrost
Turn the Mode control knob to Front Defrost
to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator
illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air
comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side win-
dow defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the Climate Control system will
return to the previous setting.
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12.3-inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost Control
button on the touchscreen, or push and
release the button on the faceplate to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10
minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and
a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up
And Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the tempera-
ture bar towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the tempera-
ture bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature
settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
is used to synchronize the passenger tem-
perature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the Climate Control system.
There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can
be selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower con-
trol knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control
knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower set-
ting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower
bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob or press one of
the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to
adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distri-
bution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard
outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to
regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side win-
dow demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen, or push and release the button on
the blower knob to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
MAX A/C Setting
Set the temperature control knob to the MAX
A/C setting to change the current setting to
the coldest output of air. Moving the tem-
perature control knob away from the MAX
A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Condi-
tioning (A/C). The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
NOTE:
•
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off,
but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent
fogging of the windows.
•
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
•
If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water
spray from the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button on the face-
plate to change the system between recircu-
lation mode and outside air mode. The Recir-
culation indicator and the A/C indicator
(if equipped) illuminate when the Recirculation button
is pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes
except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside
of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection. Continu-
ous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside
air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use
of this mode is not recommended. On systems with
Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically if this
mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while
in this mode causes the LED on the control button to
blink and then turn off.
Front Defrost
Turn the Mode control knob to Front Defrost
to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator
illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air
comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side win-
dow defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the Climate Control system will
return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control
button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when
the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and
a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the
air forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you turn the
temperature control knob clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you turn the
temperature control knob counterclockwise.
Heater Only
Turning the temperature control knob clockwise
increases the heating temperature and turning the tem-
perature control knob counterclockwise decreases the
heating temperature.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are
seven blower speeds available. The blower
speeds increase as you turn the blower con-
trol knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control
knob counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob or press one of
the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to
adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distri-
bution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard
outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to
regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side win-
dow demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
CONTROL (ATC) — IF EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tem-
perature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
senger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it
is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically
adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed
to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the U.S./Metric customer-
programmable feature within Uconnect Settings
page 166.
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual over-
ride features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display
will be turned off when the system is being used in the
manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep every-
one comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
•
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
•
“Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for sug-
gested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheat-
ing. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is
recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is func-
tioning properly and the proper amount, type, and con-
centration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recom-
mended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control sys-
tem when the vehicle is being stored for an extended
period of time, see
page 286.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug
the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle
Interior Is Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and blower
on high. Roll down the
windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air.
Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather Turn
(A/C) on and
set the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny Operate in
(Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid Conditions Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and turn
on
(A/C) to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If wind-
shield fogging starts to
occur, move the control
to
(Mix Mode).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with the glove compart-
ment in the open position. Driving with the glove com-
partment open may result in injury in a collision.
Console Storage Compartment
The center console has both an upper and lower stor-
age compartment. To open the upper storage compart-
ment, lift the top latch. To access the lower storage
compartment, lift the bottom latch.
Under Seat Storage — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with two options for
under seat storage:
•
Non-Locking Storage Wall
•
Under Seat Locking Storage Bin
Non-Locking Storage Wall
The Non-Locking Storage Wall can be used for storage
by folding the bottom of the rear seat up and placing
items behind the wall.
There is also an option to remove the wall by removing
the four bolts that connect the storage wall to the floor.
Locking Storage Bin
Glove Compartment Release Handle
Center Console
1 — Upper Console Storage Latch
2 — Lower Console Storage Latch
Non-Locking Storage Wall
Locking Storage Bin (Closed View)
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If equipped, the Locking Storage Bin is located below
the rear seats. It can be accessed by folding the rear
seat bottom upward into the Stadium Position.
The Locking Storage Bin has two keyed locks on the
front of the bin and uses the same key as the glove
compartment and the center console for your vehicle.
Inside the bin are three removable dividers to set up
storage that works best for you.
The Locking Storage Bin can be removed by unfasten-
ing the four bolts that attach the bin to the vehicle floor
using the provided #40 Torx head driver and ratchet.
The bottom of the storage bin has rubber mats that
need to be removed to access the four bolts. These
bolts can then be stored in the fastener bin below the
rear seat.
Your Locking Storage Bin also has a front handle that
makes it easier to carry and pull out from the floor of
the vehicle when the four bolts that attach the bin to
the floor are removed.
Rear Behind Seat Storage — If Equipped
The rear wall storage bin is located behind the right
rear seat.
Rear Wall Storage Bin
To access the storage bin, pull upward on the pull strap
located on the upper outboard side of the right rear
seat, and fold the seatback forward.
NOTE:
The rear seatback can be locked using the vehicle key
to secure items in the rear wall storage bin. The seat
lock is located on the upper outboard side of each seat-
back. Both seatbacks should be locked to limit access
to items behind seat.
Rear Wall Netting
The rear wall netting can be accessed the same way as
the rear wall storage bin.
Fastener Bin
Your vehicle is equipped with a Fastener Bin used to
store the fasteners for the doors, windshield, and hard
top (if equipped) while not in use. The Fastener Bin is
located behind the rear seat storage bin. The Fastener
Bin contains foam inserts for each of the fasteners;
they are removable.
To remove the Fastener Bin:
1. Remove the lid and foam inserts from the Fastener
Bin.
2. Remove the three nuts from the bottom of the Fas-
tener Bin.
NOTE:
The soft top fasteners do not go in the Fastener Bin.
Under Seat Storage (Open View)
1 — Key Locks
2 — Removable Bolts
3 — Handle
Rear Wall Storage Bin
1 — Rear Wall Storage Bin
2 — Pull Strap
Rear Wall Netting
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
LIGHTED CUPHOLDERS —
IF EQUIPPED
On some vehicles, the front cupholders are equipped
with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the
front passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dim-
mer Controls
page 51.
AUX/USB CONTROL
The Media Hub is located on the instrument panel,
below the climate controls. Behind the media hub
access door, the Media Hub contains one AUX port, a
Type C USB port and one standard USB port. Both USB
ports allow you to play music from smartphones or USB
devices through the vehicle’s sound system.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features,
if equipped. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to your
device up to an hour after the vehicle is turned off.
NOTE:
•
Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will
begin charging and is ready for use with the system.
Type C and Type A charge-only USB ports can be
used at the same time but cannot be used simulta-
neously while playing media. When both Type C and
Type A charge-only USB ports are in use they will be
charged at a reduced rate.
•
Both ports share a single data connection. The user
cannot switch between Type A and Type C.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB
port and another device is plugged into the Type C USB
port, a message will appear and allow you to select
which device to use.
Located inside the center console, a second USB port
allows you to only charge USB devices.
Fastener Bin
1 — Door Removal
2 — Under Seat Storage Bin Removal
3 — Folding Windshield
4 — Hard Top Removal
Media Hub
1—AUXPort
2—TypeCUSBPort
3—TypeAUSBPort
Center Console Charge-Only USB Port
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Depending on your vehicle’s specifications, the USB
port may contain playback capabilities and will allow
you to play music from your smartphone device or USB
devices through your vehicle’s sound system.
A third and fourth USB port are located behind the cen-
ter console, above the power inverter. Both ports are
charge only.
When a new device or smartphone is plugged into the
USB ports, one of the following message will display
depending on the device being utilized:
•
“A new device is now connected. Previous connec-
tion was lost”.
•
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost”.
•
“Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use the
second device”.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
that the device is not supported by the system.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the external device while
driving. Failure to follow this warning could result in a
collision.
JEEP® WIRELESS SPEAKER —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a wireless
Bluetooth® speaker.
Getting To Know Your Speaker
USB (Charge Only) On The Back Of The Center Console
Speaker Buttons
1 — Power ON/OFF
2 — Bluetooth®/App Pairing
3 — Play/Pause
4 — Volume Down/Skip Back
5 — Voice Control/Call Control
6 — Volume Up/Skip Forward
Rear Speaker Outlets
1 — Reset Button
2 — Battery Status Button
3 — Service/Diagnostic Port (Non-charging, Non-
customer use port)
4 — Type A USB Charging Port
5 — Battery Status LED
6 — Speaker Charging Port
7—AUXPort
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
Jeep® Wireless Speaker Location
The Jeep® wireless speaker is located behind the right
rear passenger seat. In order to access the Jeep® wire-
less speaker, the seat will need to be folded down or
tilted forward.
To remove the Jeep® wireless speaker, pull on the
strap located on top of the mount for the speaker.
When the strap is pulled, the Jeep® wireless speaker
can easily be lifted from the mount.
When placing the Jeep® wireless speaker back in the
mount, simply put the speaker back in the mount.
Then push/rotate forward on the front of the speaker
until the speaker locks in place.
Charging External Devices
The Jeep® wireless speaker is capable of charging
most USB-enabled smartphones and tablets using the
type A USB charging port.
To use the external charging feature:
1. Turn the speaker on.
2. Plug the USB power cable into the type A USB charg-
ing port on the back of the speaker.
3. Insert the other end of the USB power cable into
your device to immediately begin charging.
Charging The Speaker
Before using the Jeep® wireless speaker for the first
time, fully charge your Jeep® wireless speaker until the
battery indicator light stays solid green.
The Jeep® wireless speaker in-vehicle dock is the most
ideal way to fully charge the speaker with the ignition in
ON/RUN or ACC. The speaker can also be charged with
a power adapter.
NOTE:
Jeep® wireless speaker will not charge within vehicle
dock while the ignition is fully off.
To charge the Jeep® wireless speaker with a power
adapter, insert the power adapter into a wall outlet.
Next, plug the power adapter into the Jeep® wireless
speaker charging port on the back of the speaker.
NOTE:
Power adapter needed for the Jeep® wireless speaker
has to have a range of 14 VDC to 16.5 VDC, with a mini-
mum of 2.7A and a barrel connector dimension of
5.5 mm by 2.5 mm. Power adapter is not included.
Monitoring Battery Level Status LED Light
Red 40% or lower
Yellow 40% to 70%
Green 70% to 100%
Wireless Speaker Location
Placement of the Wireless Speaker
Rotating the Wireless Speaker
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Temperature
Temperature <-4°F (< -20°C)
-4 to 32°F
(< -20 to 0°C)
32 to 113°F
(0 to 45°C)
115 to 140°F
(46 to 60°C)
>140°F (>60°C)
Speaker state (docked or Direct Current [DC]
plugged in)
OffOnOnOnOff
Speaker state (undocked and running off battery) Off On On On Off
Speaker’s Internal Battery Charging No No Yes No No
The Jeep® wireless speaker contains a lithium-ion rechargeable battery. Typical charging temperatures for these types of batteries are from 0 to 45°C (32 to 113°F).
NOTE:
The functions described are for when the Jeep® wireless speaker is undocked from the vehicle. When plugged into the docking station, the Jeep® wireless speaker functions as
part of the vehicle’s sound system.
Phone & Bluetooth® Pairing
A feature of the Jeep® wireless speaker is the ability for
the Jeep® wireless speaker to connect to devices using
Bluetooth®. Follow these simple steps to connect a
Bluetooth®-enabled device to the Jeep® wireless
speaker:
1. Press and hold the power button for 2-3 seconds to
turn the Jeep® wireless speaker on.
2. Turn “on” Bluetooth® for the device you desire to be
connected to the Jeep® wireless speaker. For
instructions on how to turn on and off Bluetooth®
settings for the desired device, refer to the device’s
user manual.
3. When powered on, the Jeep® wireless speaker will
automatically enter pairing mode. To pair a second
device, press and hold the Bluetooth® button for
2-3 seconds, until an audio cue is heard. Then go to
the devices’ Bluetooth® settings and select “Jeep®
Speaker” from the list.
The Jeep® wireless speaker will remember the last
eight devices it has paired with.
NOTE:
If the Jeep® wireless speaker is left on with an inactive
Bluetooth® connection for 30 minutes, it will automati-
cally turn off. The Jeep® wireless speaker can be
turned on again by pressing and holding the power but-
ton for 2-3 seconds.
Resetting Your Jeep® Wireless Speaker
To reset the Jeep® wireless speaker to its original fac-
tory setting, press and hold the reset button under the
back cover for 8-10 seconds.
Speakerphone
The speakerphone feature can be used by pressing the
“Voice Control” button on the Jeep® wireless speaker.
This feature can be used to answer and end calls over
the speakerphone.
Volume And Playback Control
Volume can be increased or decreased by briefly press-
ing the + button or - button. When the maximum vol-
ume is reached, an audio cue will sound.
To skip to the next track, press and hold the + button.
To go to the previous track, press the - button.
Qualcomm TrueWireless™ Stereo
A feature of the Jeep® wireless speaker is being able to
pair two Jeep® wireless speakers together for Qual-
comm TrueWireless™ Stereo. This feature allows for two
Jeep® wireless speakers to play left and right stereo
sound.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
Below are the steps needed for Qualcomm TrueWire-
less™ Stereo:
1. Push and hold the power button on both Jeep®
wireless speakers until both speakers turn on.
2. Place both speakers into Qualcomm TrueWireless™
Stereo pairing mode. This can be achieved by press-
ing and holding the Battery Status button on both
speakers until an audio notification is heard from
both speakers.
3. Connect one of the Jeep® wireless speakers to the
Bluetooth® source. Refer to previous section
“Phone & Bluetooth® Pairing” for additional
information.
4. Once the Jeep® wireless speaker is connected to
the Bluetooth® device, audio will be played from
both speakers.
NOTE:
While in Qualcomm TrueWireless™ Stereo mode, the
volume will not have independent speaker control.
Pushing the Up or Down Volume button on either Jeep®
wireless speaker will affect the audio output on both, as
well as volume adjustments on the Bluetooth® device.
Waterproof Features
The Jeep® wireless speaker is IP67 waterproof certified
with design in mind to withstand rainfall, waterjets,
splashing and being submerged in up to 3 ft (1 m) of
water for up to 30 minutes.
CAUTION!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Warnings, Caution & Legal Information
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not
expose the Jeep® wireless speaker to rain or moisture
while charging. The Jeep® wireless speaker should not
be exposed to dripping or splashing, and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be placed on or
near it while being charged or charging other devices.
As with any electronic products, use care not to spill
liquids into any part of the product. Liquids can cause a
failure and/or a fire hazard. The power supply must be
used indoors only. Make no modifications to the prod-
uct or accessories. Unauthorized alterations may com-
promise safety, regulatory compliance, and system per-
formance, and will void the warranty. Do not place any
flame sources, such as lighted candles, on or near the
Jeep® wireless speaker. The Jeep® wireless speaker
contains small parts that may be a choking hazard and
is not suitable for children under age 3. Do not continue
charging the battery if it does not reach full charge
within the specified charging time. Overcharging may
cause the battery to become hot, rupture, or ignite. If
you see any heat deformation or leakage, properly dis-
pose of the battery. Do not attempt to charge the bat-
tery in temperatures outside the range of 32°- 104°F
(0° - 40°C). If the battery begins to leak, do not allow
the liquid to come in contact with your skin or eyes. If
contact has been made, wash the affected area with
plenty of water and seek medical attention immedi-
ately. Do not expose the Jeep® wireless speaker or bat-
tery to excessive heat, including direct sunlight or fire.
Do not store or use inside cars in hot weather, where it
can be exposed to temperatures in excess of 115°F
(60°C). Doing so may cause the battery and power sup-
ply to generate heat, rupture, or ignite. Using the Jeep®
wireless speaker in this manner also may result in a
loss of performance and a shortened life expectancy.
Extended exposure to direct sunlight may damage the
external appearance and material qualities. Do not step
on, throw, or drop batteries or the power supply or
device, or expose them to a strong shock. Do not
pierce, crush, dent, or deform the batteries or power
supply in any way. If either becomes deformed, properly
dispose of it. Do not short-circuit batteries. Do not
attempt to service the Jeep® wireless speaker yourself.
Opening or removing covers may expose you to danger-
ous voltages or other hazards and will void the manu-
facturer’s warranty. To prevent risk of fire or electric
shock, avoid overloading wall outlets, extension cords,
or integral convenience receptacles. Your Bluetooth®
device (mobile phone, music player, tablet, laptop, etc.)
must support the A2DP Bluetooth® profile in order to
work wirelessly with your Jeep® wireless speaker. The
A2DP profile is supported by most recent mobile prod-
ucts with built-in Bluetooth® capability. Please refer to
your device’s user manual for details and instruction
regarding the Bluetooth® profiles it supports. This
device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Jeep® follows Safety Instruction for CE- LV. Do not oper-
ate products in temperatures outside the range of -5 to
40°C. Operating Frequency Band: 2402 MHz to
2480 MHz. Maximum RF power: 6 dBm EIRP. Do not
install this equipment in a confined space or building,
such as a bookcase or similar unit that is not well-
ventilated. The ventilation should not be impeded by
covering the ventilation openings with items such as
newspaper, tablecloths, curtains etc.
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
There is danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent
type. If the battery or battery pack is exposed to
excessive heat or fire, personal injury may occur.
CAUTION!
•
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended
to prevent theft and/or damage.
•
Always remember to cycle the ignition to OFF to
prevent battery drainage.
NOTE:
Please refer to the information on the bottom of the
Jeep® wireless speaker for electrical and safety infor-
mation before installing or operating the Jeep® wire-
less speaker.
Directive 2014/53/EU Article 10 Obligations of
Manufacturers
2. Manufacturers shall ensure that radio equipment
shall be so constructed that it can be operated in at
least one Member State without infringing applicable
requirements on the use of radio spectrum.
10. In cases of restrictions on putting in to service or of
requirements for authorization of use, information avail-
able on the packaging shall allow the identification of
the Member States or the geographical area within a
Member State where restrictions on putting into service
or requirements for authorization of use exist. The Com-
mission may adopt implementing acts specifying how to
present that information. Those implementing acts
shall be adopted in accordance with the advisory proce-
dure referred to in Article 45 (2).
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use
of such marks by FCA US LLC is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of their respec-
tive owners.
POWER OUTLETS
There is a 12 Volt (13 A) auxiliary power outlet that can
provide power for accessories designed for use with the
standard power outlet adapters.
The front power outlet is located in the center of the
instrument panel below the climate controls, and is
powered from the ignition switch. Power is available
when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
tric shock and failure.
Front Power Outlet
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
CAUTION!
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W
(13 A) at 12 Volts. If the 160 W (13 A) power rating
is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alter-
nator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
POWER INVERTERS — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 V (400 W) maximum inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to convert
Direct Current (DC) to Alternating Current (AC).
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to 400 W.
Certain video game consoles exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
There may also be a second 115 V (400 W) maximum
exterior power inverter located on the rear right side of
the truck bed near the tailgate. This inverter can be
turned on by the Instrument Panel Power Inverter
switch located to the left of the steering wheel. This
inverter can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to 400 W.
Certain video game consoles exceed this limit, as will
most power tools. The indicator light on the power
inverter switch will be illuminated when the inverter is
turned on.
NOTE:
400 W is the maximum for the inverter, not each outlet.
If two outlets are in use, 400 W is shared among the
devices plugged in.
Power Inverter
Power Inverter Switch (If Equipped)
Exterior Truck Bed Power Inverter (If Equipped)
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 400 W is exceeded,
the power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the
inverter should automatically reset.
NOTE:
•
The Power Inverter will only turn on if the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
•
Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter will turn off if the power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
tric shock and failure.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES —
IF EQUIPPED
Four auxiliary switches are located in the lower switch
bank of the instrument panel and can be used to power
various electrical devices.
The functionality of the auxiliary switches can be
changed via the Uconnect Settings. All switches can be
configured for setting the switch type operation to latch-
ing or momentary, power source of either battery or
ignition, and ability to hold last state across key cycles.
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when switch type
is set to latching and power source is set to ignition
within Uconnect Settings
page 166.
The auxiliary switches manage the relays that power
four blunt cut wires. These wires are located under the
instrument panel in the passenger compartment and
under the hood to the right, near the battery.
In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a fused
battery wire and ignition wire are also located in the
interior, on the passenger side under the instrument
panel.
A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided with
the auxiliary switches to aid in the connection/
installation of your electrical devices.
Auxiliary Switches
Auxiliary Switch Connections — Under Hood
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Instrument Panel
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
Wire Color Chart
Circuit Function Fuse Wire Color Locations
Aux Switch 1 F93 – 40 Amp Beige/Pink Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side near battery)
Aux Switch 2 F92 – 40 Amp Green/Pink Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side near battery)
Aux Switch 3 F103 – 15 Amp Orange/Pink Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side near battery)
Aux Switch 4 F108 – 15 Amp Dark Blue/Pink Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side near battery)
Battery F72 – 10 Amp Red/White Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
Ignition F50 – 10 Amp Pink/Orange Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
The power windows feature allows for movement of the
windows with the push of a button. The power window
switches are located on the instrument panel below the
climate controls. Push the switch downward to open the
window and pull upward to close the window.
The top left switch controls the left front window and
the top right switch controls the right front window. The
bottom left switch controls the left rear window and the
bottom right switch controls the right rear window.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
•
The power window switches will remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
•
There are window switches located on the rear of
the center console for the rear passenger windows.
AUTO-DOWN FEATURE
The driver door power window switch and the front pas-
senger door power window switch have an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch down, past the detent,
and release and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
down briefly, without going past the detent, and release
it when you want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Power Window Switches
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL SLIDING REAR WINDOW —
IF EQUIPPED
To open the rear sliding window, push the release but-
ton inward while sliding the window into the open
position.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch allows you to disable the
window controls on the rear passenger doors. To dis-
able the window controls, rotate the switch downward.
To enable the window controls, rotate the switch
upward.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs
with the rear windows open, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buf-
feting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
GLADIATOR TOPS
PROVIDED TOOLS
For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with your
vehicle located in the center console. This kit includes
the necessary tools required for the operations
described in the following sections. All pieces fit into the
ratchet for easy use.
NOTE:
The soft top and the hard top are to be used indepen-
dently. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage
resulting from both tops being installed at the same
time.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, the soft top
system will be provided in a separate box located in the
bed of the vehicle for shipping purposes only.
Release Button Location
Window Lockout Switch
Provided Tools
1 — Ratchet
2 — #T50 Torx Head Driver
3 — #T40 Torx Head Driver
4 — 15 mm Socket
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
LOWERING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
•
Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
up/removed unless the quarter windows are also
removed. Dangerous exhaust gases could enter
the vehicle causing harm to the driver and
passengers.
•
The fabric quarter windows and fabric top are
designed only for protection against the elements.
Do not rely on them to contain occupants within
the vehicle or to protect against injury during an
accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.
•
Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch
points when installing and removing the soft top.
The lift assist mechanism and side bows may
cause serious injury if fingers or hands get caught
in between.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting
or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was
not designed as a structural member of the vehicle
and, thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads
other than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top
has been folded down for a period of time, the top will
appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it diffi-
cult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction of
the vinyl or acrylic materials of the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the
top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size
and the top can then be installed. If the temperature is
41°F (5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top
down or roll the rear or side curtains.
CAUTION!
•
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax buildup may
result.
•
Do not lower the top when the temperature is
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
•
Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or
fully lowered.
•
Follow the proper steps for cleaning and caring for
your vehicle’s fabric top
page 288.
•
Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top frame-
work when opening or closing. Damage to the top
may result.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains, or mildew on the top material:
•
It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet may
allow water to drip into the vehicle's interior.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle's interior.
•
The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle's interior.
Scan me
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Side View Top And Components
1—#1Bow 6 — Quarter Panel Upper Hook And Loop
2—#2Bow 7 — Quarter Panel Vertical Retainer
3—#3Bow 8 — Rear Window Vertical Retainer
4—#4Bow 9 — Quarter Panel Cover Assembly
5—#5Bow
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
Rear Window View And Components
1 — Top Retainer 4 — Pull Tabs
2 — Left Vertical Retainer 5 — Lower Center Retainer
3 — Lower Retainers 6 — Right Vertical Retainer
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lowering The Soft Top Into The Sunrider® Position:
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Fold both sun visors forward against
the windshield.
2. Release the header latches from the
crossbar by pulling the handle down-
ward. Make sure the hook is fully disengaged from
its receiver.
3. From both the left and right sides, lift up on the
#1 Bow of the soft top to begin the operation. It is
recommended to utilize two people for this
procedure.
4. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the side link
to fold the soft top rearward.
5. Secure the top in this position by using the two
hook-and-loop fasteners provided in the center
console.
NOTE:
The vehicle can be driven in the Sunrider® Position
with the rear window and quarter panel cover assem-
blies fully installed or completely removed.
CAUTION!
Quarter panel cover assemblies and rear window
must be either all in or all out.
Scan me
Step Two
Step Three
Step Four
Step Five
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
Removing The Rear Window And
Quarter Panel Cover Assemblies
NOTE:
Both quarter panel cover assemblies and the rear win-
dow must ALL be removed together, or installed
together.
1. Start by removing the rear window first. Use the two
straps located on the bottom of each side of the
rear window to remove the right and left vertical
retainers, as well as the lower center retainer.
2. While keeping the rear window level, slide it outward
in either direction until it is completely separate
from its retainer. Do not pull downward while
removing the rear window. Damage to the retainer
could result. Store the rear window in the soft top
rear window storage bag (if equipped), or in a safe
location
page 75.
3. After removing the rear window, remove the quarter
panel cover assemblies starting with either side.
Disengage the quarter panel cover assembly from
the bottom by pulling the fabric at the bottom
upward.
4. With two hands, grab the front of the quarter panel
cover assembly and pull outward to disengage it
from its retainer on the door frame.
5. Pull the quarter panel cover assembly up and out
from the bottom, then pull it down and away from
the vehicle to remove.
Step One (Right Side Shown)
Step One
Step Two
Step Four
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Repeat this procedure for the other quarter panel
cover assembly. Store the assemblies in the soft top
rear window storage bag (if equipped), or a safe
location.
Soft Top Rear Window Storage Bag —
If Equipped
To safely store the soft top rear window, proceed as
follows:
1. With the bag opened completely, fold the fabric
divider downward and lay the rear window in the
bottom of the bag.
2. Fold the divider upward, covering the rear window.
3. Lay the first quarter panel cover assembly all the
way to the right side and the second quarter panel
cover assembly on the left side. Secure both using
the two hook-and-loop fastener straps on each side.
NOTE:
The quarter panel cover assemblies are marked “1”
and “2” on the inside of the panel assembly.
4. Close the storage bag and store in a safe location.
Step Five Step One
Step Two
Step Three
1 — Left Quarter Panel Cover Assembly
2 — Right Quarter Panel Cover Assembly
Step Four
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
RAISING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. From the Sunrider® Position, remove straps if previ-
ously secured.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in dam-
age to the soft top or vehicle.
2. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top toward
the front of the vehicle, manually guiding the top
into the closed position.
3. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the
header latch downward to engage the hook into its
receiver.
4. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the
hook, locking the latch into place.
5. Repeat steps three and four on the other side.
Scan me
Step One
Step Two
Step Two
Step Three
Step Four
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Installing The Rear Window And Quarter
Panel Cover Assemblies
NOTE:
Both quarter panel cover assemblies and the rear win-
dow must ALL be removed together, or installed
together.
If the rear window and quarter panel cover assemblies
were previously removed, proceed as follows to install:
1. Guide the top of the quarter panel cover assembly
up into the retainer.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow all quarter panel cover assembly and
rear window install steps could result in damage to
the Soft Top or vehicle.
2. Engage the plastic retainers on the front of the
cover assembly (toward the front of the vehicle)
starting at the top, and working downward.
NOTE:
It is critical that the retainers are fully engaged
before the vehicle resumes motion.
3. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the upper
front corner of each quarter panel cover assembly
by pressing firmly.
4. From either side, guide the rear window into the
retainer while keeping the window level.
5. Engage the retainer along the bottom of the rear
window beginning on the left side of the vehicle and
working toward the center. Then, move to the right
side of the vehicle and continue from the center,
working to the right until the rear window is secured
in the lower retainer.
6. Engage the vertical retainers up the right and left
side of the rear window.
Step One
Step Two
Step Three
Step Four
Step Five
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
7. Tuck the rear window under the soft top fabric and
press firmly.
8. Engage the rear window retainers in the lower right
and left corners.
CAUTION!
Quarter panel cover assemblies and rear window
must be either all in or all out.
REMOVING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Fully lower the soft top
page 70.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in dam-
age to the soft top or vehicle.
2. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, unscrew the two Torx head fasteners on the
inside of each top mechanism.
3. Utilizing two people, lift the soft top up and away
from the vehicle, careful to avoid the vehicle’s sport
bar and trim. Store the soft top in a safe, clean, and
dry location.
4. Remove the door frames. The rear door frames
must be removed before the front door frames
page 87.
5. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, unscrew the six Torx head fasteners on both
rear corners and the back of the cab, then remove
the belt rail.
NOTE:
Folding down the rear seats is recommended to pro-
vide easier access to the fasteners.
Step Six
Step Seven
Scan me
Step Two
Step Five
1 — Corner Fasteners
2 — Rear Fasteners
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INSTALLING THE SOFT TOP
NOTE:
If installing the soft top immediately after removing the
hard top, ensure the wire harness is stored properly,
and not tucked under the belt rail
page 83.
1. Install the belt rail on the rear of the vehicle. Secure
the belt rail using the six fasteners with the provided
#T50 Torx head driver and ratchet. Refer to the fol-
lowing table for recommended torque specifications.
Torque Specifi-
cation For Torx
Fastener
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lb
(13.5 N·m)
150.5 in-lb
(17.0 N·m)
106.2 in-lb
(12.0 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the
retainers will occur.
2. Install the door frames. Start with both front doors,
followed by both rear doors. Apply the appropriate
torque specifications for the door frame Torx head
fasteners
page 87.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in dam-
age to the soft top or vehicle.
3. Unsnap and remove the storage bag. This bag
should be discarded. It was intended as a protective
cover for shipping only.
4. Ensure the top is secured with the provided hook-
and-loop fasteners, then lift the soft top onto the
rear of the cab. Line up the locater pins (one on
each side of the soft top) with the rear door frames.
5. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, install and tighten the Torx fasteners by
turning them clockwise. Secure them until they are
snug, being careful not to cross-thread the fasteners
or overtighten. Refer to the following table for rec-
ommended torque specifications. Repeat on the
opposite side.
Step One
1 — Corner Fasteners
2 — Rear Fasteners
Step Four
Step Five
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
Torque Specifi-
cation For Torx
Fasteners
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lb
(13.5 N·m)
150.5 in-lb
(17.0 N·m)
106.2 in-lb
(12.0 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. You can strip the
fasteners if they are overtightened.
6. Before driving the vehicle with the top in the
Sunrider® position, ensure the top is secured with
the provided hook-and-loop fasteners
page 76.
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S)
REMOVAL
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
CAUTION!
•
The hard top is not designed to carry any addi-
tional loads, such as after-market roof racks, spare
tires, building materials, hunting or camping sup-
plies, etc.
page 97.
•
Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the front header, sport bar,
and body, or fully removed.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
•
It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to panel removal. Removing the top, opening
a door, or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
•
The hard top assembly must be positioned prop-
erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
•
Careless handling and storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
•
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Step Five
Step Six
Scan me
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The left side panel must be removed before removing the right side panel.
Hard Top Components
1 — Right Side Panel
2 — Left Side Panel
3 — Hard Top
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
2
1. Fold down the sun visor against the windshield.
2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the left side panel
(one at the front, the rear, and outside), unlocking
them from the roof.
3. Unlatch the left side header panel latch located at
the top of the windshield.
4. Remove the left side panel.
5. Repeat the preceding steps to remove the right side
panel.
Hard Top Panel(s) Storage Bag —
If Equipped
The Freedom Top panels storage bag allows you to
store your hard top panels. The storage bag contains
two compartments.
Lay the bag for the panels down so the loops and hooks
are facing upward. Unzip the bag and fold back the
outer flap.
NOTE:
•
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to insert-
ing the panel into the panels bag.
•
There is a pouch located on the front of the bag to
store the provided hard top edge protectors that are
used when the hard top is not installed on the
vehicle.
1. Insert the left side hard top panel into the bag with
the latches facing upward.
2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is
lying flat).
3. Insert the right side Freedom Top panel into the bag
with the latches facing downward.
NOTE:
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to insert-
ing the panel into the bag.
4.
Unfold the outer flap and zip the hard top bag closed.
5.
Store the Freedom Top panels bag in a safe location.
Step Two
1 — Outside Panel Lock
2 — Rear Panel Lock
3 — Front Panel Lock
Step Three
1 — Header Panel Latched
2 — Header Panel Unlatched
Step Four
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S)
INSTALLATION
1. Set the right side panel on the windshield frame
with the locating pin in the front receiver mounting
hole, followed by the left side panel, making sure
there is no overhang. Make sure that the panels are
sitting flush with the body.
2. Secure the panel(s) using the same steps for
removal in reverse order.
NOTE:
To prevent water leaks, the seals and hard top panels
should be clear of any dust and debris prior to
reinstallation.
REMOVING THE HARD TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Open both front doors.
2. Using the provided #50 Torx head
driver and ratchet, remove the two
Torx head screws that secure the hard top at the
B-pillar (near the top of the front doors).
3. If equipped, remove the lower interior soft trim
panel (attached by the hook-and-loop fastener) by
pulling the panel away from the trim.
4. Remove the Torx head fasteners that secure the
hard top to the vehicle: two along the interior body
side, rearward of the back doors, followed by the
four fasteners along the back of the vehicle cab
using the #T50 Torx head driver.
5. Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside cor-
ner of the vehicle. To access the harness, remove
the plastic cover by pushing the cover to the side,
and sliding it off.
NOTE:
Do not force open; this will break the plastic cover.
Scan me
Step Two
Step Three
Step Four
1 — Vehicle Cab Torx Head Fasteners
2 — Body side Torx Head Fasteners
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
2
6. To release the wire harness, pull back on the red
latch (1), then push down on the black button (2)
while pulling the harness out.
7. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Install the
provided edge protectors along the bottom edges of
the hard top, and place the hard top on a soft sur-
face to prevent damage.
CAUTION!
The removal of the Hard Top requires four adults
located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution
could damage the Hard Top.
8. Store the wire harness by removing the storage
cover on the quarter trim. Use the mechanical key
blade to pry the cover open.
9. Tuck the wire harness inside the storage compart-
ment, and replace the cover.
CAUTION!
•
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
•
The hard top assembly must be positioned prop-
erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
•
The hard top is not designed to carry any addi-
tional loads, such as after-market roof racks, spare
tires, building materials, hunting or camping sup-
plies, etc.
page 97.
•
Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame and
body, or fully removed.
•
The removal of the hard top requires four adults
located on each corner. Failure to follow this
caution could damage the hard top.
Step Five
Step Six
1 — Red Latch
2 — Black Button
Step Eight
Step Nine
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INSTALLING THE HARD TOP
If the door frames are installed from soft top usage,
they must be removed prior to installation of the hard
top
page 87.
To install the hard top, place the hard top on the vehicle
while making sure that the top is sitting flush with the
body at the sides and across the back. Then follow the
removal steps in reverse order.
NOTE:
•
Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if
necessary.
•
Install the hard top using the same steps for
removal in reverse order.
When reinstalling the interior soft trim panel:
○ Be sure the panel is centered so that there is an
even gap on both sides.
○ Apply pressure over the hook-and-loop fasteners
to ensure they are properly secured.
The Torx head fasteners that attach the hard top to the
body should be torqued to 155 in-lb +/- 22 in-lb
(17.5 N·m +/- 2.5 N·m) using the provided #T50 Torx
head driver and ratchet.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the
retainers will occur.
SUNRIDER® FOR HARD TOP —
IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Do not open or close the Sunrider® top while driving.
Operating the top while driving could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
The Sunrider® soft top can be used in place of the
Hard Top Freedom Panels for quick and easy opening of
the area above the driver and front passenger seats.
To install the Sunrider® soft top, proceed as follows:
1. Remove both front Hard Top Freedom panels
page 80.
2. With the help of a second person, set the Sunrider®
top onto the top of the vehicle making sure to align
the holes at the front and rear of the side rails.
3. Swing the front frame bracket around the side of the
rail, and insert the door rail attachment bolt (pro-
vided bolt without spacer) from underneath. Tighten
with a #40 Torx head driver until snug.
4. Insert the rear door rail attachment bolt (provided
bolt with spacer) from underneath. Tighten with
#40 Torx head driver until snug.
Sunrider® For Hard Top
Lower Sunrider® Onto The Vehicle
Attach Front Door Rail Bolt
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
2
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 on the other side of the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The recommended torque specification for the front
and rear door rail attachment bolts is 8.8 ft-lb
(12 N·m).
6. Attach the rear clamp at the rear center of the
Sunrider® top using the two provided rear clamp
attachment bolts. Tighten with #40 Torx head driver
until snug.
NOTE:
The recommended torque specification for the rear
clamp attachment bolts is 3.7 ft-lb (5 N·m).
7. From inside the vehicle, lift and pull the Sunrider®
top forward using the integrated handle on the front
header of the top. Manually guide the top into the
closed position.
8. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the
header latch downward to engage the hook into its
receiver. Pull the handle back upward while squeez-
ing the hook, locking the latch into place. Repeat on
the other side.
To Open The Sunrider® Top
To open the Sunrider® top, proceed as follows:
1. Fold both sun visors forward against the windshield.
2. Release the header latches from the crossbar by
pulling the handle downward. Make sure the hook is
disengaged from its receiver.
Attach Rear Door Rail Bolt Rear Clamp Location
Push Sunrider® Top Forward
Engage Both Header Latches
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. From the front of the Sunrider® top, lift and push
the top rearward to the Sunrider® position.
4. Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop fas-
teners provided with the Sunrider® kit, and wrap
one around the side rails on each side of the
Sunrider® top to hold it in place.
DOOR FRAME — IF EQUIPPED WITH A
SOFT TOP
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection
that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for
use during off-road operation only.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
•
Opening a door or lowering a window while the top
is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle's
interior.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Careless handling and storage of the removable
door frame(s) may damage the seals, causing
water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
•
The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
DOOR FRAME REMOVAL
NOTE:
The rear door frames must be removed first, followed
by the front door frames.
1. Using the provided #T40 Torx head driver and
ratchet, loosen the Torx head fasteners located on
the underside of each door hinge (two per door),
and remove the fasteners by pulling downward.
NOTE:
The fasteners will not fall out once completely loose,
as they are held in place by design.
Release Both Header Latches
Sunrider® Position
Hook-And-Loop Fastener Placement
Step One
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
2
2. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the vehicle.
3. Store the fasteners in a secure location.
4. Repeat the procedure on the front door frame.
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
door and/or door frame(s) removed as you will lose
the protection that they can provide. This procedure is
furnished for use during off-road operation only.
DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION
1. Install the front door frame first.
2. Ensure the windshield is in the “up” position. Care-
fully place the front door frame in the rubber seal at
the top of the windshield, and line up the holes for
the Torx head fasteners (two for each door).
3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the door
frame, and insert the fasteners from underneath.
Tighten with the #T40 Torx head driver until they are
snug, being careful not to cross-thread the fasteners
or overtighten. Refer to the following table for the
appropriate torque specifications for the door frame
fasteners.
Target Torque
Specification
For Torx
Fasteners
Maximum Minimum
44.2 in-lb
(5 N·m)
53.1 in-lb
(6 N·m)
35.4 in-lb
(4 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. You can strip the
fasteners if they are overtightened.
4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on top of
the body side, just behind the rear door opening.
5. Carefully position the top of the door frame onto the
rear belt rail and the rear of the front door frame,
making sure the rubber seals lie flat. Ensure the
seals are installed correctly to avoid water leaks.
Step One
Step Two
Tighten Fasteners
Step Five
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Insert the fasteners from underneath. Tighten with
the #T40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being
careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or over-
tighten. Refer to the previous table for the appropri-
ate torque specifications for the door frame
fasteners.
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a structural
element that can provide protection in some accidents.
The windshield also provides protection against
weather, road debris and intrusion of small branches
and other objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield
down, as you lose the protection this structural element
provides.
If required for certain off-road uses, the windshield can
be folded down. However, the protection afforded by the
windshield is then lost. If you fold down the windshield,
drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the
speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h),
with low range operation preferred if you are driving
off-road with the windshield folded down.
Raise the windshield as soon as the task that required
its removal is completed and before you return to
on-road driving. Both you and your passengers should
wear seat belts at all times, on-road and off-road,
regardless of whether the windshield is raised or folded
down.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect
against personal injury:
•
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the wind-
shield down.
•
Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is
securely fastened, either up or down.
•
Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at
all times when the windshield is down.
•
Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions
for raising the windshield. Make sure that the fold-
ing windshield, windshield wipers, side bars, and
all associated hardware and fasteners are cor-
rectly and tightly assembled before driving your
vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may
prevent your vehicle from providing you and your
passengers’ protection in some accidents.
•
If you remove the doors, store them outside the
vehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose door
may cause personal injury.
LOWERING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Before completing the following steps:
○
If your vehicle is equipped with a soft top, the top
MUST be lowered
page 70, and the door
frames must be removed
page 87 prior to
lowering the windshield.
○
If your vehicle is equipped with a hard top, the
Freedom Panels MUST be removed prior to lower-
ing the windshield
page 80.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow this step will cause damage to the
vehicle’s header seal.
2. Manually remove the protective caps over the wind-
shield wiper hex bolts.
Step Five
Step Two
1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
2
3. Using the provided 15 mm socket, remove the two
hex bolts and remove the wiper arms.
4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower both sun
visors.
5. Using the provided #T40 Torx head driver, remove
the four Torx head fasteners located along the inte-
rior of the windshield (two on each side of the
header trim).
NOTE:
Store all of the mounting bolts in their original
threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping, or in
the fastener bin located below the rear seat.
6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the tie-
down bumpers (if equipped).
7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap
through the tie-down bumper on either side of the
hood and on the windshield frame. Tighten the strap
to secure the windshield in place.
CAUTION!
Do Not Overtighten! Damage to the windshield could
result.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)/Forward
Collision Warning (FCW) Sensor
Protective Cover — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a protective cover
that is to be used whenever the windshield is folded
down in order to protect the ACC/FCW sensor. To install
the cover, refer to the following instructions:
1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it hinges to
the header.
2. Swing the cover down and push on it so that it cov-
ers the opening.
3. Check to make sure the cover is secured properly.
NOTE:
Be sure to remove the cover before returning the wind-
shield to the normal position. Store the cover in the
cargo area.
Step Five
1 — Outer Torx Fasteners
2 — Center Torx Fasteners
Step Six
1 — Washer Nozzle
2 — Bumper
3 — Tie-Down
Protective Cover Installed
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Instructions
During windshield down applications, dust/dirt can
accumulate in the cover and block the camera lens.
Use a microfiber cloth to clean the camera lens, mod-
ule, and inside cover, being careful not to damage or
scratch the module.
RAISING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Release the strap that secured the windshield in the
lowered position.
2. Raise the windshield.
3. Using the provided #T40 Torx head driver, reinstall
the four Torx head fasteners located along the inte-
rior of the windshield (two on each side of the
header trim). Secure them until they are snug, being
careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or
overtighten.
4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms using the pro-
vided 15 mm socket. First, align the tips of the
blade to the “T” mark in the glass. Then, while hold-
ing the arm in that position, reinstall the hex nut and
tighten until snug. Be careful not to overtighten.
Repeat for the other arm.
5. Reinstall the protective caps over the wiper arm hex
bolts and push gently until they snap into place.
NOTE:
Make sure the windshield is raised prior to installing
the tops.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
Release both of the outside hood latches.
Raise the hood slightly, locate the safety latch in the
middle, and push the latch to the right to open.
Step Three
1 — Outer Torx Fasteners
2 — Center Torx Fasteners
Step Five
1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
Hood Latch Locations
Hood Safety Latch Lever Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
2
Remove the support rod from the hood, and insert it
into the radiator crossmember.
NOTE:
•
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector
must be in PARK.
•
You may have to push down slightly on the hood
before pushing the safety latch.
•
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
•
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
CLOSING THE HOOD
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the
radiator crossmember, and install into the clip on the
hood. Lower the hood slowly. Secure both of the hood
latches.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 10 – 14 inches
(30 – 36 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure
hood is fully closed and latched. Never drive vehicle
unless hood is fully closed, and latched.
TAILGATE
OPENING
To open the tailgate, pull the release handle located on
the center of the tailgate and guide it to the lowered
position.
The tailgate is dampened to provide a slower, more con-
trolled lowering.
THREE-POSITION TAILGATE
The vehicle’s tailgate can be set to three positions:
open, mid, or closed. The mid position can be used to
provide a loading surface for transporting sheet goods.
To use the mid position, open the tailgate and lower it
to near mid position.
Secure the tailgate in this position by looping the tail-
gate straps behind the circular retainer on both sides.
Hood Prop Rod Slot
Tailgate Release Handle
Tailgate In Mid Position
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Ensure the tailgate strap is properly seated behind the
circular retainer against the sides of the sheet metal.
•
When hauling cargo using the mid position and the
tailgate, you must support the load at two forward
locations:
○ At the top of the rear wheelhouse (1)
○ Between the wheelhouse and the tailgate (2)
NOTE:
Failure to support the load at these two forward
locations could result in damage.
•
Three 2x4 boards are needed to provide support at
locations (1) and (2). Each board will need to be cut
to fit inside the pickup box.
•
The support at location (1) should be seated in the
dedicated formation on top of the wheelhouses.
•
The support at location (2) should use the remain-
ing two 2x4s. Stack the boards and place them into
the formation in the side wall of the pickup box. The
corners of the bottom board will need to be cham-
fered to fit.
NOTE:
○
All cargo transported in the pickup box must be
secured.
○
The maximum payload for the mid position is
300 lb (136 kg).
CLOSING
To close the tailgate, lift upward until both sides latch
into place.
CAUTION!
After closing, pull back on the tailgate firmly to ensure
it is securely latched. Failure to securely latch the tail-
gate could result in damage to the vehicle or cargo.
NOTE:
•
If the Tonneau Cover is installed, make sure the Ton-
neau Cover is fully closed before closing the tailgate.
•
Due to the presence of the Center High-Mounted Stop
Lamp, removal of the tailgate is not recommended.
Loop Tailgate Strap Behind Circular Retainer
Correctly Seated Tailgate Strap
Incorrectly Seated Tailgate Strap
Chamfered Boards In Pickup Box
1 — Support Location 1
2 — Support Location 2
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
2
BED RAIL TIE DOWN SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
250 lb (113 kg) and the angle of the load on each
cleat should not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal,
or damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
The Bed Rail Tie Down system allows you to properly
secure cargo in the truck bed.
There are two adjustable utility rail cleats on each side
of the bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Each utility rail cleat must be tightened down in one of
the detents along either utility rail in order to keep
cargo properly secured.
To move the utility rail cleat to any position on the utility
rail, turn the cleat retainer nut counterclockwise several
times. Then, pull out on the utility rail cleat and slide it
to the detent nearest the desired location. Make sure
the utility rail cleat is seated in the detent, and tighten
the nut.
To remove the utility rail cleats from the side utility rails,
slide the cleat to the rectangular cutout located at the
end of the rail toward the front of the vehicle.
To remove the utility rail cleat from the front utility rail,
slide the cleat to the rectangular cutout located on the
left side of the rail.
TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
The Tonneau Cover can be installed on the truck bed to
keep cargo out of view, and protect from inclement
weather.
The Tonneau Cover consists of the following features:
•
Easy roll up cover
•
Tonneau fore/aft locator
•
Crossbar inside bed locator
•
Rear latches
•
Stowage straps
NOTE:
The Tonneau Cover can be rolled up and secured at the
front of the truck bed without removing it completely.
TONNEAU COVER INSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover, proceed as follows:
1. Position the rolled up Tonneau Cover on the truck
bed and align it to the two fastener locations at the
front of the bed.
Bed Rail Tie Down Locations
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
Fastener Locations
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Using a #T50 Torx head driver, secure the fasteners
to the bed.
3. Lower the tailgate to the fully open position before
unrolling the Tonneau Cover.
4. Release the stowage straps used to secure the Ton-
neau Cover in the rolled up position.
5. Roll the Tonneau Cover rearward toward the back of
the truck bed.
6. Position both Tonneau Cover latches over the lock-
ing mechanisms (one on each side of the truck
bed), making sure the plastic retainer is correctly
seated in the forward part of the latch.
7. Once the rear Tonneau Cover bar is positioned over
the locking mechanism, grab the back of the Ton-
neau Cover and push downward on the center to
engage the locking mechanisms. Make sure an
audible “click” from both sides of the Tonneau Cover
is heard to confirm that the latch is completely
engaged.
NOTE:
If desired, the Tonneau Cover can be left in this
position (rear panel folded forward) while the tail-
gate is closed, or the tailgate can be raised to the
mid-position
page 92.
Release Stowage Strap
Roll Tonneau Cover Rearward
Correctly Seated Retainer
Incorrectly Seated Retainer
Push Downward To Lock
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
2
8. Fold the rear panel down; the tailgate can now be
raised and secured in place.
NOTE:
If not leaving the tailgate in the mid-position, the
Tonneau Cover must be closed completely prior to
fully closing the tailgate.
CAUTION!
Do not sit on the Tonneau Cover; damage to the cover
and/or cargo will occur.
TONNEAU COVER REMOVAL
To remove the Tonneau Cover, proceed as follows:
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Fold the rear panel of the Tonneau Cover forward to
reveal the red release straps.
3. Pull one of the red release straps to release the Ton-
neau Cover latch.
NOTE:
Pulling either strap will release the latches to roll the
Tonneau Cover up; there is no need to pull both at
the same time.
4. Roll the Tonneau Cover forward, starting with the
rear bar and continue to roll toward the front of the
truck bed.
5. Using the stowage straps, secure the Tonneau Cover
in the rolled up position.
6. Using a #T50 Torx head driver, remove the two fas-
teners securing the Tonneau Cover to the front of
the truck bed.
Tonneau Cover With Tailgate In Mid-Position
Release Strap Location
Roll Tonneau Cover Forward
Secured Tonneau Cover
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Utilizing two people, lift the Tonneau Cover up and
away from the truck bed.
NOTE:
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been completely
rolled up, and straps are secure, before removing.
8. Store in a safe location.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models ONLY.
The Roof Luggage Rack is designed to allow for carrying
an additional cargo load on vehicles equipped with a
Hard Top. The load carried on the roof, when equipped
with a luggage rack, must not exceed 100 lb (45 kg),
this includes the weight of the crossbars, and it should
be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to
be sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized dealer
through Mopar® parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on
the luggage rack, does not exceed the maximum
vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity.
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible
and secure the load appropriately.
•
Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
should be secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
•
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift. It is rec-
ommended to not carry large flat loads, such as
wood panels or surfboards, which may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
•
Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratchet-
ing mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
Fastener Locations
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
2
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS
98
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Scan me
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
3
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
○
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
2. Temperature Gauge
○
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
○
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper lim-
its of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth-
ers could be badly burned by steam or boiling cool-
ant. It is recommended that you call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
○
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
page 98.
4. Fuel Gauge
○
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position.
○
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
filler door is located
page 150.
5. Speedometer
○
Indicates vehicle speed.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver.
With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles (kilometers) in the odometer. Your instru-
ment cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
The driver interactive display, located in the instrument
panel, indicates how systems are operating and gives
you warnings when a system, or systems, needs your
attention. The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want to make selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The Instrument Cluster Display is located in the center
of the instrument cluster. The display contains different
areas of vehicle information.
•
The top line where Reconfigurable Telltales, Com-
pass Direction, Outside Temperature, Time, Range,
Audio Info, MPG or Trip are displayed. This also dis-
plays the Speedometer which is an option for the
upper center reconfigurable, but is not the default.
Default setting is Menu Title.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
The main display area where the menus and pop-up
messages are displayed.
•
The lower line where telltales, menu name and
menu page are displayed.
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Up
And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up
or down arrow button allow you to
cycle through the Main Menu Items.
They allow you to change the Main Screen area and
Menu Title area.
Left
And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left
or right arrow button allow you to
cycle through the submenu screens of the Main menu
item.
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. To
reset displayed/selected features push and hold the OK
button for two seconds.
OIL LIFE RESET — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system. The
“Oil Change Required” message will dis-
play in the instrument cluster display for
five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indi-
cate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine
oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to
the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN mode (do not start the engine).
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle Info" in the
instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge resets
to 100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
OFF ROAD+ DISPLAY —
IF EQUIPPED
When the Off Road+ button is pushed in the switch
bank, the Instrument Cluster Display will begin to show
messages related to the feature. Depending on the
Four-Wheel Drive mode in use, the messages will differ,
and after five seconds, all messages will clear from the
display. The messages are as follows:
•
2H: Off Road+ Unavailable, Shift to 4WD
•
4H: 4WD High Off Road+ Active
•
4L: 4WD Low Off Road+ Active
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
Scan me
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
3
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Cruise Control are
not available when using Off Road+. If either option is
selected, a dedicated message will display indicating
that the features are not usable concurrently. Mes-
sages are as follows:
•
4H: Cruise Control — Cruise Control Unavailable in
Off Road+
•
4H: Adaptive Cruise Control — Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC) Unavailable in Off Road+
•
4L: Cruise Control — Cruise Control Unavailable in
4WD Low
•
4L: Adaptive Cruise Control — Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC) Unavailable in 4WD Low
NOTE:
The behavior of Electronic Stability Control while in Off
Road+ varies depending on the 4WD status. If the
vehicle is in 4WD High, Traction Control is automatically
turned off. Also, holding the ESC OFF button for five
seconds will turn off ESC. In 4WD Low, Electronic Stabil-
ity Control automatically shuts off regardless of the Off
Road Status.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
SELECTABLE ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
Speedometer Driver Assist —
If Equipped
Messages
Vehicle Info Trip Info Screen Setup
Fuel Economy Stop/Start Audio
Off Road —
If Equipped
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
MENU ITEMS
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the speedometer menu icon is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK
button to toggle between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the left
or right arrow button to scroll through the infor-
mation submenus and push and release the OK button
to select or reset the resettable submenus.
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Tempera-
ture — Automatic Trans-
mission Only
Oil Pressure
Oil Temperature Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Off Road — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Off Road menu icon is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display. Push and release the left
or
right
arrow button to scroll through the information
submenus.
Drivetrain
•
Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical and
numerical value of calculated average front wheel
angle from the steering wheel orientation.
•
Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock” graphic
only during 4WD High, 4WD Auto, or 4WD Low
status.
•
Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (if equipped): dis-
plays front and rear or rear only axle locker graphic,
and sway bar connection graphic with text message
(connected or disconnected).
Pitch And Roll
Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in the graphic
with the angle number on the screen.
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
When vehicle speed becomes too high to display the
pitch and roll, “- -” will display in place of the numbers,
and the graphic will be grayed out. A message indicat-
ing the necessary speed for the feature to become
available will also display.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the ACC
system.
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the steering
wheel) until one of the following displays in the instru-
ment cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET - button (located on the
steering wheel), and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display.
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instru-
ment cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activ-
ity occurs, which may include any of the following:
•
System Cancel
•
Driver Override
•
System Off
•
ACC Proximity Warning
•
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
page 137.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted in the instru-
ment cluster display. Push and hold the OK button to
reset average fuel economy feature.
Toggle left
or right to select a display with or
without Current Fuel Economy Information.
•
Range – The display shows the estimated distance
(mi or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remain-
ing in the tank. When the Range value is less than
10 miles (16 km), the Range display will change to a
“LOW” message. Adding a significant amount of fuel
to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW” message and a
new Range value will display. Range cannot be reset
through the OK button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading
will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the
vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
•
Average – The display shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) since the last
reset.
•
Current – The display shows the current fuel
economy (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) while driving.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display, then push and release the left
or
right
arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the
following:
•
Distance
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. The screen will display the
Stop/Start status.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. The screen will display the
Stop/Start status.
Phone Call Status
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status pop-up will
display on the screen. The pop-up will remain until the
phone is answered or ignored.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
3
NOTE:
The call status will temporarily replace the previous
media source information displayed on the screen.
When the pop-up is no longer displayed, the display will
return to the last used screen.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This fea-
ture shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the right
arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will
be a closed envelope, and “No Stored Messages” will
display.
Screen Setup
NOTE:
The Screen Setup feature can only be used while the
vehicle is not in motion.
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK
button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts
on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is displayed in
the instrument cluster as well as the location in which
that information is displayed.
NOTE:
Based upon equipment options and current vehicle
status, some of the features may not be available.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
None Time Current Econ
Compass Range to Empty Trip A Distance
Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance
Upper Right
None Time Current Econ
Compass Range to Empty Trip A Distance
Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance
Upper Center
None Time Current Econ
Compass Range to Empty Trip A Distance
Audio Average Econ Trip B Distance
Outside Temp Menu Title Speedometer
Favorite Menus
Speedometer Vehicle Info Off Road —
If Equipped
(show/hide)
Driver Assist —
If Equipped
(show/hide)
Fuel Economy
(show/hide)
Trip Info
(show/hide)
Stop / Start —
If Equipped
Audio
(show/hide)
Messages
Screen Setup Vehicle Settings
— If Equipped
Gear Display — If Equipped
•
Full
•
Single
Current Gear
•
Off
•
On
Odometer
•
Show
•
Hide
Defaults
•
Cancel
•
Restore
BATTERY SAVER ON, BATTERY
SAVER MODE MESSAGE, AND
ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION
ACTIONS (IF EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sen-
sor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electri-
cal system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure,
or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, elec-
trical load reduction actions will take place to extend
the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is
done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential
electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is run-
ning. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due
to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On Some Systems May Have Reduced Power” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge
at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
•
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diagnos-
tic on the charging system continuously.
•
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indi-
cate a problem with the charging system
page 106.
The electrical loads that may be switched off
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
•
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
•
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
•
HVAC System
•
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
•
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
•
The charging system cannot deliver enough electri-
cal power to the vehicle system because the electri-
cal loads are larger than the capability of the charg-
ing system. The charging system is still functioning
properly.
•
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
•
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and simi-
lar devices.
•
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
•
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of
time (weeks, months).
•
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
•
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left
on when the vehicle was parked.
•
The battery was used for an extended period with
the engine not running to supply radio, lights, char-
gers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum
cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
•
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
○ Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volt, 115 Volts AC, USB ports
○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
○ Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
•
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if
any (load and ignition off draw currents).
•
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
•
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips
and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern
did not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always
refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication. All active telltales will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may appear differ-
ent based upon equipment options and current vehicle
status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected,
it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is not
on during startup, stay on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
3
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark
on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible
brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until
the condition has been corrected. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a colli-
sion. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Con-
tact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
page 131.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the
light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the trans-
mission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake ped-
als are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is run-
ning, immediate service is required and you may experi-
ence reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or
engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during
starting, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant tem-
perature is too high, this indicator will illumi-
nate and a single chime will sound. If the
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL
and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does
not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately
and call for service
page 242.
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate, and a
chime will sound, to indicate low engine oil
pressure. If the light and chime turn on while
driving, safely stop the vehicle and turn off
the engine as soon as possible. After the vehicle is
safely stopped, restart the engine and monitor the Oil
Pressure Warning Light. If the Oil Pressure Warning
Light is still illuminated, turn the engine OFF and con-
tact an authorized dealer for further assistance. Do not
operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. If the
light is no longer illuminated, the engine can be oper-
ated but it is recommended to take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the
engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the
hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the light
turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and
shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait
for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light
will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passen-
ger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and
a chime will sound
page 200.
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light
— If Equipped With A Base Instrument
Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat belt is
unbuckled in the second row. When the igni-
tion is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position, and if a seat belt in the
second row is unbuckled, a light corresponding to the
specific seat will turn on in the upper right portion of
the instrument cluster display, momentarily replacing
the configurable corner information. If a second row
seat belt that was buckled at the start of the trip is
unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt Reminder Light will
change from the buckled to the unbuckled symbol, and
a chime will sound
page 200.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This
may occur with strenuous usage such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with
the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may con-
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
3
tinue to drive normally. If Manual transmission
equipped, this warning will illuminate to warn of high
clutch temperature. This may occur with driver misuse
of clutch pedal or resting foot on the clutch pedal or
partially engaging the clutch for longer duration. If the
light turns on, it will be with an additional CLUTCH HOT
message. Stop the vehicle safely and run the engine at
idle with transmission gear in NEUTRAL (N) until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, follow the mes-
sage displayed in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire. If you continue to operate the vehicle when the
CLUTCH HOT message is displayed or Transmission
Temperature Warning Light is illuminated, you could
cause the clutch to overheat and cause a fire. If a
Service Transmission message is displayed please
seek dealer service as soon as possible, this could
indicate clutch damage and excessive slippage.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
If you continue to operate the vehicle when the
CLUTCH HOT message is displayed or Transmission
Temperature Warning Light is illuminated, you could
cause the clutch to overheat and cause severe clutch
damage, transmission damage or failure.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
system is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is
not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is Active.
The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diag-
nosed and corrected.
•
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
•
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light illuminates when there is a fuel
level sensor failure. If this light illuminates,
take it to an authorized dealer and have
them inspect it.
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the
filler cap to disengage the light. If the light
does not turn off, please see an authorized
dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2.0 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a
chime will sound. The light will remain on
until fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low
page 251.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnos-
tic System called OBD II that monitors
engine and automatic transmission control
systems. This warning light will illuminate when the igni-
tion is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as previously
referenced, can reach higher temperatures than in
normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if
you drive slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and drive-
ability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
Service 4WD Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a
fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays
on or comes on during driving, it means that
the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. It is recommend you drive
to the nearest service center and have the vehicle ser-
viced immediately.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the ACC is not
operating and needs service
page 137.
Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning Sys-
tem. Contact an authorized dealer for ser-
vice
page 194.
Service Stop/Start System Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
3
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Cruise Control System is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is a fault
in the sway bar disconnect system
page 130.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a mes-
sage is displayed to indicate that the tire
pressure is lower than the recommended
value and/or that slow pressure loss is
occurring. In these cases, optimal tire life and fuel con-
sumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition previously
mentioned, the display will show the indications corre-
sponding to each tire.
WARNING!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire fail-
ure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS mal-
function indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is rec-
ommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the 4WD Low mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels.
4WD Part Time Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the four-wheel drive part time mode, and
the front and rear driveshafts are mechani-
cally locked together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when front and/or rear
axle locker fault has been detected.
Cargo Light On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Bed Lamp has been activated.
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light indicates when the front, rear, or
both axles have been locked. The telltale will
display the lock icon on the front and rear
axles to indicate the current lock status
page 125.
Forward Collision Warning OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off
page 194.
Gear Shift Indicator Light — If Equipped
with a Premium Cluster
When the automatic transmission is in
manual mode, an up or down arrow will illu-
minate to recommend a gear shift to opti-
mize fuel economy.
Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the neutral mode
page 121.
Off Road+ Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when Off
Road+ has been activated.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear axle lock
has been activated
page 125.
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front sway bar is disconnected.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the four-wheel drive auto mode. The sys-
tem will provide power to all four wheels and
shift the power between the front and rear
axles as needed. This will provide maximum traction in
dry and slippery conditions.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
No Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is set and there is no vehicle
in front detected
page 137.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
3
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a
vehicle in front is detected
page 137.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed
page 136.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on
page 48.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on.
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light
— If Equipped With A Premium
Instrument Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat belt has
been buckled in the second row. A telltale
will display in the upper right corner of the
instrument cluster display to correspond to
the specific seating position once the seat belt has
been buckled
page 200.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-
dently and the corresponding exterior turn
signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped With a
Premium Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
has been turned on, but not set.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped With a
Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with ACC has been turned on, but
not set.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
Indicator Light — If Equipped With a
Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with ACC has been turned on, but
not set.
Two-Wheel Drive High Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the Two-Wheel Drive High mode.
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light
— If Equipped With A Base Instrument
Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat belt has
been buckled in the second row. A telltale
will display in the upper right corner of the
instrument cluster display to correspond to
the specific seating position once the seat belt has
been buckled.
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light
— If Equipped With A Base Instrument
Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat belt is
unbuckled in the second row. When the igni-
tion is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position, and if a seat belt in the
second row is unbuckled, a light corresponding to the
specific seat will turn on in the upper right portion of
the instrument cluster display, momentarily replacing
the configurable corner information. If a second row
seat belt that was buckled at the start of the trip is
unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt Reminder Light will
change from the buckled to the unbuckled symbol, and
a chime will sound.
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear passenger
seats are unoccupied, and will illuminate in
the upper right portion of the instrument
cluster display, momentarily replacing the
configurable corner information.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when the cruise control
has been turned on, but not set.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Base Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Base Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when cruise control has
been turned on, but not set.
Selec Speed Control (SSC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Selec Speed Con-
trol is activated. Selec Speed Control is avail-
able in 4WD Low ONLY.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With
the low beams activated, push the multifunc-
tion lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull
the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,
"flash to pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and trans-
mission control systems. When these systems are oper-
ating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent perfor-
mance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions
well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II sys-
tem will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information
to assist your service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
3
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause fur-
ther damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a connec-
tion port to allow access to information related to the
performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access this informa-
tion to assist with the diagnosis and service of your
vehicle and emissions system
page 166.
WARNING!
•
ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
•
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
○
Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING!
○ Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control sys-
tem. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states and/or provinces that require an
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this
check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready
for testing.
The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a
battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be
determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may
fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
○
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
○
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replace-
ment, you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the previously men-
tioned test routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
WARNING!
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in NEU-
TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock-
ing ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor.
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, if the vehicle is stalled, the engine will start
regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed
to the floor. This feature enhances off-road perfor-
mance by allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L with-
out having to press the clutch pedal. The 4WD LOW
Indicator Light will illuminate when the transfer case
has been shifted into this mode.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the PARK
position (vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL). Apply
the brake before shifting to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button. The igni-
tion will return to the OFF position.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle
stopped) and the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pushed once, the transmission will automatically
select PARK and the engine will turn off, however
the ignition will remain in the ACC position (NOT the
OFF position). Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
3. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle
speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once will turn the
engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC
position.
4. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the
engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC posi-
tion (NOT the OFF position) if the engine is turned
off when the transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and the ignition
will cycle to the OFF position after 30 minutes of inac-
tivity if the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not
running) position and the transmission is in PARK.
115
4
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN.
To change the ignition modes without starting the
vehicle and use the accessories, follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (instrument cluster
will display “ACC”).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (instrument
cluster will display “ON/RUN”).
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (instrument
cluster will display “OFF”).
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing
the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the follow-
ing pages occur. It is a back-up system and should not
be relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
•
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
display and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
•
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not
be relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
•
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
•
Driver door is ajar or if the driver door is removed
and the driver is not on the seat (seat pad sensor
detects driver missing)
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
•
Ignition is switched from ON/RUN to OFF
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the engine
will turn off and the ignition will change to ACC position.
After 30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF automati-
cally, unless the driver turns the ignition OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
•
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
•
Driver door is ajar or if the driver door is removed
and the driver is not on the seat (seat pad sensor
detects driver missing)
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
•
Driver seat belt is unbuckled
•
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift To P Then Shift
To Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed
in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear
selector must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P”
will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left
in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added pre-
caution, always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
4WD LOW
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle
in 4WD LOW.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both
of these conditions are met:
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed
in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue
until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the driver’s door
is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the “P” in the instrument cluster
display and on the gear selector. As an added precau-
tion, always apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER (BELOW
–22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use
of an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has
not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the bat-
tery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank
cycle.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
“Extended Park Starting” procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then
repeat the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-
tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait
10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure and the vehicle has not
experienced an extended park condition as defined
previously, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank
the engine for no more than 10 seconds. This should
clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
Leave the ignition key in the ON/ RUN position, release
the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the con-
verter and vehicle.
•
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly
page 240.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically and will
decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
4
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades see
page 296.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should
be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an auto-
matic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission in
REVERSE or FIRST gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
•
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will
flash if vehicle speed is detected. A chime will sound
if the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) to alert
the driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, other-
wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of
PARK.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position on an automatic
transmission as a substitute for the parking brake.
Always apply the parking brake fully when parked
to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
Parking Brake Lever
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-
mission in PARK, a manual transmission in
REVERSE or FIRST gear. Failure to do so may
cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the park-
ing brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
CAUTION!
•
Never drive with your foot resting on or partially
pressing the clutch pedal. Never attempt to hold
the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially
engaged. Operating vehicle in this manner may
cause the clutch to overheat and cause permanent
damage to the clutch. If you continue to operate
the vehicle in this manner, the “CLUTCH HOT” mes-
sage or Transmission Temperature Warning Light
will be displayed in the instrument cluster. For
more information
page 105.
•
Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear
selector as the force exerted, even if slight, could
lead over time to premature wear of the gearbox
internal components.
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up.
This is normal.
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and place
the gear selector into the desired gear position (the
diagram for the engagement of the gears is displayed
on the handle of the selector). The gear position will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position,
lift the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move
the gear selector all the way left and then forward.
SHIFTING
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelera-
tor pedal.
You should always use FIRST gear when starting from a
standing position.
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmission is nor-
mal. This noise can be most noticeable when the
vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged
(clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when
driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when
the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is
not an indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
Manual Transmission Shifter
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
4
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle
speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up shift speeds may not apply.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
3.6L
Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 50 (80) 65 (104) 70 (112)
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 40 (64) 55 (88) 65 (105)
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the preceding chart are for 2H and 4H only. Vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
DOWNSHIFTING
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recom-
mended to preserve brakes when driving down steep
hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time provides
better acceleration when you desire to resume speed.
Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid
overspeeding the engine and clutch.
NOTE:
Above certain speeds, downshifts may be blocked and
not available.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
•
Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears
at higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine
and clutch systems. Any attempt to shift into lower
gear with clutch pedal pressed may result in dam-
age to the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear
and releasing the clutch may result in engine
damage.
•
When descending a hill, be very careful to down-
shift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding
the engine which can cause engine damage,
and/or clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed. If transfer case is in low range the vehicle
speeds to cause engine and clutch damage are
significantly lower.
•
Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause engine damage
and/or damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal
is pressed.
•
Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
pressed could result in clutch damage.
Maximum Recommended Downshift
Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch
pedal is pressed.
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the preceding chart are for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
The “Service Transmission” warning message will
appear on the instrument cluster to indicate an issue
with the manual transmission system. If the message
stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the
manual transmission system is not functioning properly,
and vehicle performance may be severely degraded. If
the “Service Transmission” message appears in the
instrument cluster, have the vehicle serviced
immediately.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
•
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator sol-
idly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting
the vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
4
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P)
before the ignition can be turned to the OFF position.
This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the
vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This
system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever
the ignition is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission will NOT shift out of the PARK position
if the engine is not running even when the brakes are
applied. Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and
the ignition is OFF (not in ACC position) before exiting
the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
INTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds
the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal
must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
8–SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To
shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL
into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for nor-
mal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is returned to
the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with envi-
ronmental and road conditions. The transmission elec-
tronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts
on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and precision shifts will develop
within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL (AutoStick)
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the
AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear selector for-
ward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick)
position (beside the DRIVE position) will manually select
the transmission gear, and will display the current gear
in the instrument cluster
page 125.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward),
it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission
gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
GEAR RANGES
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of
PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
•
Apply the parking brake
•
Shift the transmission into PARK
•
Turn the ignition off
•
Remove the key fob from the vehicle
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles, be sure that the transfer
case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
•
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator sol-
idly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting
the vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
•
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on
the gear selector and firmly move the gear selector
all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
•
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
•
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
4
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with the engine running. Apply the park-
ing brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you
must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the igni-
tion to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
•
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
•
For Recreational Towing page 158.
•
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle page 244.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position should be used for all normal operating
conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift
control to select a lower gear
page 125. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build-up.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified
depending on engine and transmission temperature as
well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suit-
able level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi-
tion) enables full manual control of transmission shift-
ing also known as AutoStick mode. Toggling the gear
selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position will manually select the transmis-
sion gear, and will display the current gear in the instru-
ment cluster
page 125.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and indi-
cate what actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
NOTE:
•
In cases where the instrument cluster message indi-
cates the transmission may not re-engage after
engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a
desired location (preferably, at an authorized
dealer).
•
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. An authorized dealer
has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of
your transmission.
•
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until
the engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This feature
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into
the MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position).
The current transmission gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you can use the
gear selector (in the MANUAL position) to manually shift
the transmission. Tapping the gear selector forward (-)
while in the MANUAL (M) position will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear. Tapping the selec-
tor rearward (+) will command an upshift.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as follows:
•
The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
•
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the
driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission
as the vehicle is accelerated.
•
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND
gear (or THIRD gear, in 4L range). Tapping (+) (at a
stop) will allow starting in SECOND gear. Starting out
in SECOND or THIRD gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
•
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
•
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
•
Holding the gear selector in the (-) position will
downshift the transmission to the lowest gear pos-
sible at the current speed.
•
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
•
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE:
When Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick is not
active.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector
to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive
the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
FOUR-POSITION TRANSFER CASE —
IF EQUIPPED
The transfer case provides four positions:
•
2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
•
4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range)
•
N (Neutral)
•
4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)
For additional information on the appropriate use of
each transfer case position, see the following
information:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range maximizes
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range pro-
vides additional traction for loose, slippery road sur-
faces only.
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
4
N (Neutral)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the park-
ing brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position dis-
engages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle.
See Recreational Towing for further information
page 158.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions, such
as hard-surfaced roads.
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H
and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road
surfaces only and not intended for normal driving. Driv-
ing in the 4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads
will cause increased tire wear and damage to the drive-
line components. For further information on shifting
into 4H or 4L
page 126.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts
are locked together. The light will illuminate when the
transfer case is shifted into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed
will be approximately three times (four times for Rubi-
con models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given
road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H TO 4H OR 4H TO 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting
speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the accel-
erator pedal after completing the shift. Do not acceler-
ate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a constant
force when shifting the transfer case lever.
NOTE:
•
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear
driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels
are spinning can cause damage to the transfer
case.
•
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experi-
enced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold
temperatures.
•
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is
normal.
During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up.
This is normal.
4H TO 4L OR 4L TO 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h),
shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or
press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While
the vehicle is coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift
the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do
not pause with the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once
the shift is completed, place the automatic transmis-
sion into DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual
transmission.
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due
to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment
and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is
with the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the
vehicle moving faster than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up.
This is normal.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not
drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
FIVE-POSITION TRANSFER CASE —
IF EQUIPPED
The transfer case provides five positions:
•
2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
•
4H AUTO (Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range)
•
4H PART TIME (Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High
Range)
•
N (Neutral)
•
4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)
For additional information on the appropriate use of
each transfer case position, see the following
information:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends
power to the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses
a loss of traction. This range provides additional trac-
tion for varying road conditions.
4H PART TIME
Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range — This range
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This
range provides additional traction for loose, slippery
road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the park-
ing brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position dis-
engages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle
page 158.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-
wheel drive position (2H) or four-wheel drive position
(4H AUTO) for normal street and highway conditions on
dry hard surfaced roads.
For variable driving conditions, the 4H AUTO mode can
be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel
drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is
engaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy
than the 2H mode.
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
4
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H
and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road
surfaces only and not intended for normal driving. Driv-
ing in the 4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads
will cause increased tire wear and damage to the drive-
line components. For further information on shifting
into 4H or 4L
page 128.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts
are locked together. The light will illuminate when the
transfer case is shifted into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed
will be approximately three times (four times for Rubi-
con models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given
road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H TO 4H AUTO OR 4H AUTO TO 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H AUTO can be made with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting
speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the accel-
erator pedal after completing the shift. Do not acceler-
ate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a constant
force when shifting the transfer case lever.
2H/4H AUTO TO 4H PART TIME OR 4H PART
TIME TO 2H/4H AUTO
Shifting between 2H/4H AUTO to 4H PART TIME can be
made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The pre-
ferred shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h).
With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will
engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release
the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do not
accelerate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a con-
stant force when shifting the transfer case lever.
NOTE:
•
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear
driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels
are spinning can cause damage to the transfer
case.
•
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experi-
enced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold
temperatures.
•
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is
normal.
During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up.
This is normal.
4H PART TIME/4H AUTO TO 4L OR 4L TO 4H
PART TIME/4H AUTO
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h),
shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or
press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While
the vehicle is coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift
the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do
not pause with the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once
the shift is completed, place the automatic transmis-
sion into DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual
transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due
to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment
and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is
with the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the
vehicle moving faster than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up.
This is normal.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not
drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAC-LOK REAR AXLE —
IF EQUIPPED
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force
to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by
the loss of traction at one driving wheel. If traction dif-
fers between the two rear wheels, the differential auto-
matically proportions the usable torque by providing
more torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving
conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface,
a slight application of the accelerator will supply maxi-
mum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential,
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel
remaining on the ground and cause you to lose con-
trol of your vehicle.
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) FRONT AND
REAR — IF EQUIPPED
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument
panel (to the right of the steering column).
This feature will only activate when the following condi-
tions are met:
•
Ignition in ON/RUN position, vehicle in 4L (Four-
Wheel Drive Low Range).
•
Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
•
Both right and left wheels on axle are at the same
speed.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch
down to lock the rear axle only (the “REAR ONLY” will
illuminate), push the switch up to lock the front axle
and rear axle (the “FRONT + REAR” will illuminate).
When the rear axle is locked, pushing the bottom of
switch again will lock or unlock the front axle.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully
locked or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.
Axle Lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L
(Four-Wheel Drive Low Range), or the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF position.
The Axle Lock disengages at speeds above 30 mph
(48 km/h), and will automatically re-lock once vehicle
speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) REAR ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED
The rear axle may be locked in 4H if the proper condi-
tions are met.
WARNING!
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways.
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument
panel (to the right of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
Axle Lock Switch Panel
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
4
This feature will only activate when the following condi-
tions are met:
•
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4H (Four-Wheel
Drive High Range).
•
The vehicle must be in OFF ROAD+ active
page 131.
•
Vehicle must be in ESC “Full Off” mode.
•
Vehicle must not be actively in a high wheel slip or
tight cornering condition.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch
down to lock the rear axle only (“REAR ONLY” will
illuminate).
To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE LOCK OFF
button.
Axle Lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4H
(Four-Wheel Drive High Range), OFF ROAD+ is turned
off by the driver, ESC “Full Off” is exited, or the ignition
switch is turned to the OFF position.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the rear axle is fully
locked or unlocked.
The rear Axle Lock system may temporarily disengage
the rear locker under some conditions.
If this occurs, the rear axle will automatically re-lock as
soon as the system allows.
If an Axle Lock request cannot be completed by the sys-
tem within 5 seconds due to vehicle operating condi-
tions not being correct, the request will be canceled
and the driver may need to re-request the locker to be
activated.
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR
DISCONNECT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic discon-
necting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater
front suspension travel in off-road situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch
located on the instrument panel (to the right of the
steering column).
Push the SWAY BAR switch to disconnect or connect the
sway bar. The Sway Bar Indicator Light (located in the
instrument cluster) will illuminate when the bar is dis-
connected. The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash dur-
ing activation transition, or when activation conditions
are not met. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in
on-road mode during normal driving conditions.
WARNING!
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected before
driving on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above
18 mph (29 km/h); a disconnected stabilizer/sway
bar may contribute to the loss of vehicle control,
which could result in serious injury. Under certain
circumstances, the front stabilizer/sway bar
enhances vehicle stability and assists with vehicle
control. The system monitors vehicle speed and will
attempt to reconnect the stabilizer/sway bar at
speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a
flashing or solid Sway Bar Indicator Light. Once
vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h),
the system will once again attempt to return to off-
road mode.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H
or 4L and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off-
road position
page 125. The Sway Bar Indicator
Light will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been
fully disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to
left and right suspension height differences. This condi-
tion is due to driving surface differences or vehicle
loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the
bar must be aligned. This alignment may require that
the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from
side to side.
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR switch
again.
SWAY BAR Switch
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road
mode, the Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash in the
instrument cluster and vehicle stability may be
reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over
18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than 18 mph
(29 km/h) with a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar
may contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury.
OFF ROAD+ — IF EQUIPPED
When activated, OFF ROAD+ is designed to improve the
user experience when using specific Off Road driving
modes. To activate Off Road+, push the OFF ROAD+
switch in the switch bank. The vehicle’s performance
will improve depending on which Four-Wheel Drive
(4WD) mode is activated.
NOTE:
OFF ROAD+ will not function in Two-Wheel Drive High
(2H) mode. If the button is pushed while in 2H mode,
the cluster display will show the message “OFF ROAD+
Unavailable Shift to 4WD”.
When OFF ROAD+ is active, the following features will
activate:
•
The OFF ROAD+ telltale will illuminate in the Instru-
ment Cluster Display
•
A mode specific message will display the Instrument
Cluster Display
•
Off Road pages will launch on the radio head-unit
(if equipped)
•
The Off Road Camera will launch (if equipped)
Once in OFF ROAD+, the vehicle will begin to behave in
different ways depending on the 4WD mode in use. The
following enhancements will occur when using OFF
ROAD+.
4L
•
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Rock Crawl and
controllability focus, change in shifting schedule
when rock crawling, pedal calibration shifted to
de-gain and low range, operates at lower vehicle
speeds
•
Traction Control: Aggressive brake lock differential
tuning at slower speed or FIRST gear
•
OFF ROAD+: Recall the last status between ignition
cycles
4H
•
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Improved sand
performance/wheel slip focus, change in shift
schedule for sport mode, pedal calibration set to
aggressive, operates at elevated vehicle speeds
•
Traction Control: High wheel speed, slip tuning brake
lock differential with no engine management
•
Electronic Stability Control: ESC Partial Off with
unlimited speed
•
OFF ROAD+: Will default to OFF between ignition
cycles
Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will
not function while using OFF ROAD+. A dedicated clus-
ter message will display indicating this if either feature
is activated while in OFF ROAD+.
If the ESC OFF button is pushed while in OFF ROAD+,
the following will occur on the vehicle:
•
Push of the ESC OFF Button: Traction Control will
turn off, but Stability Control will remain active.
•
Hold the ESC OFF Button for five seconds: Traction
Control and Stability Control will turn FULL OFF.
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electro-Hydraulic
Power Steering system that will provide increased
vehicle response and ease of maneuverability. If the
Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering system experiences a
fault that prevents it from providing power steering
assist, then the system will provide mechanical steering
capability.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri-
cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
OFF ROAD+ Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
4
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
and a flashing icon are displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, it indicates that
the vehicle needs to be taken to an autho-
rized dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost
power steering assistance
page 100.
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an icon
are displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indi-
cates that extreme steering maneuvers may have
occurred, which caused an over temperature condition
in the power steering system. You will lose power steer-
ing assistance momentarily until the over temperature
condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments
until the light turns off
page 100.
NOTE:
•
Even if power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at very low
vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
•
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer
for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is developed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Pressing the clutch pedal
will automatically restart the vehicle.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start system be dis-
abled during off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery
used to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 Volt
vehicle electrical system. The secondary battery is
located behind the wheel well for the front passenger
wheel.
AUTOSTOP MODE
WARNING!
•
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main and
the supplemental batteries must be disconnected
to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical
system.
•
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
engine start. It will remain in STOP/START NOT READY
until you drive forward with a vehicle speed greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are
met, can go into an STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE
mode.
To Activate The STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE Mode,
The Following Must Occur:
•
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster
page 98.
•
Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
•
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL position
and the clutch pedal must be fully released.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will fall to
the Stop/Start position, the STOP/START AUTOSTOP
ACTIVE message will appear, and the heater/air condi-
tioning (HVAC) air flow will be reduced.
Battery Locations
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE
DOES NOT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
In following situations the engine will not stop:
•
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
•
Outside temperature is less than 10°F (–12°C) or
greater than 109°F (43°C)
•
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different
than temperature set on Auto HVAC
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
•
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature
•
Battery is discharged
•
When driving in REVERSE
•
Hood is open
•
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral)
•
Driver's seat is not occupied or driver door is open
•
Vehicle is at high altitude
•
The vehicle is on a steep grade
•
Forward Gear is engaged
•
Steering angle is beyond threshold
•
System fault is present
•
HVAC is set to MAX A/C
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of
the items listed previously.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
AUTOSTOP MODE
When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the engine will
start when the clutch pedal is pressed (does not
require complete/full pedal press). The vehicle will go
into STOP/START SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Conditions that will cause the engine to start automati-
cally while in STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE mode,
the engine will start automatically when:
•
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different
than temperature set on Auto HVAC
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
•
Stop/Start Autostop Active time exceeds five
minutes
•
Battery voltage drops too low
•
Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h)
•
Stop/Start OFF switch is pressed
•
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral)
•
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold (ESS
Models Only)
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The “Stop/
Start OFF” message will appear in instrument cluster
display within the Stop/Start section, and the Autostop
function will be disabled
page 98.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and
back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start Off switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/
Start telltale will appear in the instrument cluster dis-
play
page 100.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized dealer.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
4
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is developed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal
or pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically
restart the engine.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts, to handle the additional engine starts.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start system be dis-
abled during off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery
used to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 Volt
vehicle electrical system. The secondary battery is
located behind the wheel well for the front passenger
wheel.
AUTOSTOP MODE
WARNING!
•
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main and
the supplemental batteries must be disconnected
to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical
system.
•
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
engine start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/
START READY.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
•
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
page 100.
•
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
•
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illumi-
nate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings
will be maintained upon return to an engine-running
condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE
DOES NOT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/
Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster
display Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations,
the engine will not stop:
•
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
•
Driver’s door is not closed
•
Battery temperature is too warm or cold
•
Battery charge is low
•
The vehicle is on a steep grade
•
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-
able cabin temperature has not been achieved
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed
•
HVAC is set to MAX A/C
Battery Locations
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature
•
Engine or exhaust temperature is too high
•
The transmission is not in a forward gear
•
Hood is open
•
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral)
•
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure
•
Accelerator pedal input
•
Vehicle speed threshold has not been achieved from
previous Autostop
•
Steering angle is beyond threshold
•
ACC is on and speed is set
•
Vehicle is at high altitude
•
System fault is present
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of
the items listed previously.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
AUTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is pressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon
engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-
matically While In Autostop Mode:
•
The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE
•
To maintain cabin temperature comfort
•
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different
than temperature set on Auto HVAC
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
•
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted
•
Battery voltage drops too low
•
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed
•
A Stop/Start system error occurs
•
Stop/Start Autostop Active time exceeds five
minutes
•
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral)
•
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The “Stop/
Start OFF” message will appear in instrument cluster
display within the Stop/Start section, and the autostop
function will be disabled
page 100.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON con-
dition every time the ignition is turned off and back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start Off switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/
Start telltale will appear in the instrument cluster dis-
play
page 100.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
•
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
•
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the fea-
ture selected.
•
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable,
and vice versa.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
4
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control system takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster dis-
play will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the
on/off button a second time. The cruise indicator light
will turn off. The system should be turned off when not
in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system
or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always ensure the sys-
tem is off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and
on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
•
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result ina1mphspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 mph.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result ina1km/hspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 km/h.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until
the button is released, then the new set speed will
be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is
released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise
Control.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (can-
cel) button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Cruise Control without eras-
ing the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
•
Vehicle parking brake is applied
•
Stability event occurs
•
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
•
Engine overspeed occurs
•
Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmission only)
•
Vehicle is operating at a low RPM (manual transmis-
sion only)
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position, erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con-
venience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
The Cruise Control function performs differently if your
vehicle is not equipped with ACC
page 136.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a radar sensor
and a forward-facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
NOTE:
•
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
•
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adap-
tive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning
system.
•
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will
not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected
page 302.
WARNING!
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
•
The ACC system:
○ Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
○ Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
○ Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
You should turn the ACC system off and do not use:
•
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
•
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
•
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
•
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
4
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is
located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the follow-
ing appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read “ACC
SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instru-
ment cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
•
System Cancel
•
Driver Override
•
System Off
•
ACC Proximity Warning
•
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state,
the instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
•
When in 4WD Low
•
When the brakes are applied
•
When the parking brake is applied
•
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
•
When the manual transmission is in first gear
•
When the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
(manual transmission)
•
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
•
When the brakes are overheated
•
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
•
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
•
When ESC Full Off mode is active
•
When Off Road+ (if equipped) is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
display will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time,
the system will turn off and the instrument cluster dis-
play will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Distance Increase Button
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Distance Decrease Button
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the
Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning
on (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode (ACC not
enabled), the system will not react to vehicles ahead.
In addition, the proximity warning does not activate
and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to
the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the
vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always
be aware which mode is selected.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
•
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond
the set speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER
OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument cluster
display.
•
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be control-
ling the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be deter-
mined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
•
The brake pedal is applied
•
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
•
The Anti-Lock Brake system (ABS) activates
•
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
•
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
•
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates
•
The vehicle parking brake is applied
•
A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs
•
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
•
The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h)
(manual transmission only)
•
The clutch is pressed for more than 10 seconds
(manual transmission only)
•
The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more than
10 seconds (manual transmission only)
•
The driver shifts to FIRST gear (manual transmission
only)
•
Vehicle is operating at a low RPM (manual transmis-
sion only)
•
When Off Road+ (if equipped) is enabled
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
•
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
•
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
•
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
•
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
•
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
•
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will
display the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
4
NOTE:
•
While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop longer than two seconds, the system
will cancel. The driver will have to apply the brakes
to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
•
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by push-
ing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
•
Pushing the SET (+),orSET(-) button once will
result ina1mphspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 mph.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result ina1km/hspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 km/h.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until
the button is released. The new set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) or SET (-) but-
ton, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
•
When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
•
The ACC system applies the brake down to a full
stop when following a vehicle in front. If your vehicle
follows a vehicle ahead to a standstill, your vehicle
brakes will release two seconds after coming to a
full stop.
•
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change
on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshift-
ing may occur while climbing uphill or descending
downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to
maintain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking tem-
perature exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (lon-
gest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar
(short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle
speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain
the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in
the same lane, the instrument cluster displays the ACC
Set with Target Indicator Light, and the system adjusts
vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
•
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed
•
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor
•
The distance setting is changed
•
The system disengages page 138
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC sys-
tem applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to main-
tain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display
and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display
is a warning for the driver to take action and does not
necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to
the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver uti-
lizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic
Transmission Only)
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to
a standstill while following the vehicle in front, your
vehicle will resume motion without the need for any
driver action if the vehicle in front starts moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will
release. A cancel message will display on the instru-
ment cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a stand-
still, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. A cancel message will dis-
play on the instrument cluster display and produce a
warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at
this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when condi-
tions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument clus-
ter display will display the above message and the sys-
tem will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels
with reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after
the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
4
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal
of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of
the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
•
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
•
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure
and require a sensor realignment.
•
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged
due to a collision, see an authorized dealer for
service.
•
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermar-
ket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system fail-
ure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at an
authorized dealer.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” warning will display and a chime will sound
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions,
such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the
inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster
display will read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system
will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any
vehicles or objects in its path this warning may tempo-
rarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full
functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the windshield and forward-facing
camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster dis-
play reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporar-
ily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merg-
ing in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stabil-
ity, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is
out of the curve, the system will resume your original
set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until
it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may
not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-
changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to
apply the brakes if necessary.
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until
they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Offset Driving Condition Example ACC Hill Example Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
4
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the
vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle
ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider this
stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not previ-
ously detect movement from it. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle
when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a park-
ing maneuver). For system limitations and usage pre-
cautions, see
page 147.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is
in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-
mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A warning will
appear in the instrument cluster display indicating the
vehicle is above ParkSense operating speed. The sys-
tem will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type
and orientation of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type
and orientation of the obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
page 98. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obsta-
cle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center front
region with no chime. As the vehicle moves closer to
the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving
closer to the vehicle and a fast sound tone will be heard
and will change from fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the
obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving
closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast
to continuous.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
4
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the sys-
tem is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance (inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches (120-100
cm)
39-25 inches (100-65 cm) 25-12 inches (65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when
an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is station-
ary, and the brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are
programmable.
The settings may be programmed through the Uconnect
system
page 166.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and
high. The factory default volume setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
ENABLING AND DISABLING
PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster
display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch
LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the
ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires
service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentar-
ily, and then the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS”, “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message. When the gear selector is moved
to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted con-
dition, the instrument cluster display will display a
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear,
see an authorized dealer.
If the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see
an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE
SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap,
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the
vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches
(10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the
sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
•
When you turn the ParkSense system off, the instru-
ment cluster display will show a vehicle graphic of
the ParkSense on/off state for two seconds. Fur-
thermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains
off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition.
•
When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show the “ParkSense OFF” mes-
sage. This message will be displayed for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
•
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
4
•
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
•
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers,
trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches
(30 cm) of the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so
can result in the system misinterpreting a close
obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message to appear in the instrument cluster display.
•
ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is
in the lowered or open position. A lowered tailgate
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly be disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper when the
vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sen-
sors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see
an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the gear selector is in REVERSE. The
image will be displayed in the touchscreen display
along with a caution note to “Check Entire Surround-
ings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds
this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the tailgate, above the vehicle license plate.
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview camera
function.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Go to the Controls screen by pressing the Controls
button located on the bottom of the Uconnect dis-
play, and then press Back Up Camera.
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Cam-
era delay turned off, the rear Camera mode is exited
and the previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Cam-
era delay turned on, the rear Camera image will be dis-
played for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted
into PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or
the touchscreen X button to disable display of the Rear
View Camera image is pressed.
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through the Back Up Camera button in the Controls
menu, and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal
to 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image is
initiated. The image will continue to be displayed until
the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be dis-
played continuously until deactivated via the touch-
screen X button, the transmission is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
•
The touchscreen X button to disable display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its pro-
jected back up path based on the steering wheel posi-
tion. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
hitch/receiver.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0-1ft(0-30cm)
Yellow 1ft-6.5ft(30cm-2m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or
greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed,
and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while
in any gear, Zoom View is available. By pressing the
“magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the display
screen, the image will zoom in to four times the stan-
dard view. Pressing the icon a second time will return
the view to the standard Back Up Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE,
the Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until
the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and
speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the icon
will appear gray.
•
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
4
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that
allows you to you see an on-screen image of the front
view of your vehicle. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a caution note “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
NOTE:
The system will stay active while in 4WD Low.
The TrailCam system has programmable settings that
may be selected through the Uconnect system
page 166.
Manual Activation Of The TrailCam
TrailCam view can be activated via the below methods:
•
Press the FWD Camera button on the controls screen.
•
Press the Forward Facing Camera button on the
apps menu.
•
Press the TrailCam button on the Off Road Pages.
•
Press the Off Road+ button when Auto Launch Off
Road+ (if equipped) has been selected under cam-
era settings.
The TrailCam view can also be activated by pressing the
icon on the Back Up Camera view. The Back Up
Camera view can also be activated by pressing the
icon on the TrailCam view.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Cam-
era Delay turned off and TrailCam view is active, the
TrailCam mode is exited and the previous screen
appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Cam-
era Delay turned on and the TrailCam view is active, the
TrailCam image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is placed
in the OFF position, or the touchscreen X button to dis-
able display of the TrailCam view is pressed.
Whenever the TrailCam image is activated through the
Manual Activation Methods, and the vehicle speed is
greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), a display
timer for the image is initiated. The image will continue
to be displayed until the display timer exceeds
10 seconds.
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h) while in 2WD or 4WD High, the TrailCam
image will be displayed continuously until deacti-
vated via the touchscreen X button, the transmis-
sion is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
•
The touchscreen X button to disable the display of
the camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
•
The TrailCam view will stay active regardless of the
vehicle speed and time while in 4WD Low.
Cleaning The TrailCam
Press and hold the Clean Camera button located on the
TrailCam view to wash the TrailCam. Washer fluid will
stop when the button is released.
•
The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds at a
time while holding the button.
•
The Clean Camera system is not available when
windshield washing is in process.
When enabled, active dynamic Tire Lines are projected
on the ground plane of the TrailCam view based on the
steering wheel position.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
FUEL FILLER CAP
The fuel filler cap is located on the left side of the
vehicle. To access the fuel filler cap, push on the fuel
filler door to unlatch it. To close the fuel filler door, push
on it a second time. If the fuel filler cap is lost or dam-
aged, be sure the replacement cap is the correct one
for this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
Front View Camera
Fuel Filler Door
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counterclockwise.
3. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler pipe.
Fill the vehicle with fuel.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full. Wait five seconds before removing the
fuel nozzle to allow excess fuel to drain from nozzle.
5. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close
the fuel filler door.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) to turn on.
•
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermar-
ket cap can cause the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE:
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
•
Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn until
you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap
is properly tightened.
•
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL
will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened every
time the vehicle is refueled.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic sys-
tem can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects
a malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking"
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the mes-
sage will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is
detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL.
Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver's side door or B-pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number
is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day
and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears
on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front
and rear GAWR. Total load must be limited so GVWR
and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of
the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Fuel Filler Cap
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
4
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the
cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label repre-
sents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement
tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle
for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be deter-
mined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for
operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been
exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the
vehicle should then be determined separately to be
sure that the load is properly distributed over the front
and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the
GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the specified
GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or
rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low
and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and
the way the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cover-
age, follow the requirements and recommendations in
this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR
page 151.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 2,000 lb (907 kg) or
more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR
page 151.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load
on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by
the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can
be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associ-
ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
An electronic TSC, if equipped, recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel
brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer TW, just as if
it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other
connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches
are commonly used to tow small and medium-sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering
more consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by
traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a
Weight-Distributing (load equalizing) Hitch are recom-
mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be
required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
•
Weight-Distributing Hitch systems may not be com-
patible with surge brake couplers. Consult with
your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable
Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional
information.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
4
Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the
trailer (do not connect the trailer).
2. Measure the height from the top of the front fender
to ground, this is height H1.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height from the top of the front fender
to ground, this is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distribut-
ing bars per the manufacturer’s recommendations
so that the height of the front fender is approxi-
mately H1 (H2=H1).
6. The truck can now be driven.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industr y Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain in this section.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
Measuring Height (H)
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS
(MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT
RATINGS)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight
ratings) refer to the following website addresses:
•
www.jeep.com
•
jeep.ca (Canada)
To locate your vehicle towing specs:
1. Select the vehicles drop down to select your vehicle
2. Select model
3. Select year
4. Select specs
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the
front of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the
tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to
sway severely side to side which will cause loss of
control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trail-
ers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The TW of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information Plac-
ard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are
recommended:
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Ser-
vicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer, never
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as pos-
sible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to con-
trol. You could lose control of your vehicle and have
a collision.
(Continued)
Weight Distribution
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
4
WARNING!
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause
a loss of control, poor performance or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in Neutral. Always, block or
"chock" the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
○ GVWR
○ GTW
○ GAWR
○ TW rating for the trailer hitch utilized
Towing Requirements — Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a com-
pact spare tire.
•
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full-size spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
•
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
•
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
•
Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
further information.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and
possible personal injury.
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
electronic brake controller is not required.
NOTE:
This vehicle has an aftermarket brake controller
connector under the dash to the left of the brake
pedal. This will be a four pin connector and will be
gray in color.
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights
And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer con-
nector. Refer to the following illustrations.
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s
electrical connectors) before launching a boat into
water.
•
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping and backing
the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shift-
ing when towing. However, if frequent shifting does
occur while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift
control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build-up. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
AutoStick — If Equipped
•
When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance
and avoids frequent downshifts. For example,
choose “5” if the desired speed can be maintained.
Choose “4” or “3” if needed to maintain the desired
speed.
•
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or
vehicle speed when grade and road conditions
allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
•
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disen-
gage until you can get back to cruising speed.
•
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads
to maximize fuel efficiency.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2—Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
4
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE
See Instructions
•
Automatic transmission in PARK.
•
Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL [N]).
•
Transfer case in (N) Neutral.
•
Tow in forward direction.
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral), automatic transmission must be in PARK, and manual transmission must be in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.
CAUTION!
•
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all
four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
•
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case.
•
Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK for recreational towing.
•
Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not in Neutral) for recreational towing.
•
Before recreational towing, perform the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into N (Neutral)” to be certain that the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral). Otherwise, internal
damage will result.
•
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously listed requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not cov-
ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the park-
ing brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position dis-
engages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) before recre-
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or
press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine off.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into N (Neutral).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into DRIVE or REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on
manual transmissions) for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission
in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.
10. Turn the engine off.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual
transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL).
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
N (Neutral) and the engine running. With the transfer
case in N (Neutral) ensure that the engine is OFF
before shifting the transmission into PARK.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suit-
able tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out of N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Turn the engine off.
7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.
NOTE:
When shifting the transfer case out of N (Neutral),
the engine should remain off to avoid gear clash.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or place
manual transmission in NEUTRAL.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions),
and check that the vehicle operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a nar-
rower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds
as conventional passenger cars any more than low-
slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily
in off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of con-
trol or vehicle rollover.
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
4
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Side Step Removal — If Equipped
NOTE:
Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be
removed to prevent damage.
1. There are two nuts connecting to the body side and
one bolt connecting to the underbody on each
attachment bracket. There are four attachment
brackets on each side step.
2. Remove two nuts and one bolt from the underside
of the vehicle for each of the four brackets. Repeat
for other side of vehicle.
3. After all bolts and nuts have been removed, pull the
side step assembly off of the vehicle.
4. To reinstall the side steps align the studs to the
body side holes and fasten all nuts on all four brack-
ets. Then secure all four bolts to the underbody.
Repeat the reassembly procedure for the other side.
Bumper End Cap Removal — If Equipped
The end caps on your vehicle’s front bumper can be
removed by the following steps:
NOTE:
Bumper end caps are removable on steel bumpers only.
1. Loosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR bracket
(Bolts #1 and #2) to the end cap using a T45 Torx
bit screwdriver. Do not remove the bolts.
2. Remove the remaining eight bolts.
3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle and
store it where it will not get damaged.
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.
Fastener Locations (One Side)
Underside Nuts
Bolt #1
Bolt #2
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Basics Of Of f-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-
road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
before proceeding. There are many types of surface
conditions: hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect
on your vehicle's steering, handling and traction. Con-
trolling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-
road driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering
wheel and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sud-
den accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases,
there are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal
lights. Therefore, you will need to use your own good
judgment on what is safe and what is not. When on a
trail, you should always be looking ahead for surface
obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan
your future driving route while remembering what you
are currently driving over.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start system be dis-
abled during off-road use.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo.
Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-
road situation.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other com-
bustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
When To Use 4L Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L for additional trac-
tion and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascend-
ing or descending steep hills, and to increase low speed
pulling power. This range should be limited to extreme
situations such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or
sand where additional low speed pulling power is
needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h)
should be avoided when in 4L range.
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L range when operating the vehicle on
dry pavement. Driveline hardware damage can result.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultane-
ous use of the brake and throttle (two-footed driving).
When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,
using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep
the vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is
also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle
on a steep incline.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
SNOW
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear
and the transfer case into 4L if necessary. Do not shift
to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and trac-
tion will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning
your steering wheel no more than a quarter turn quickly
back and forth, while still applying throttle. This will
allow the tires to get fresh traction and help maintain
your momentum.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine brak-
ing may cause skidding and loss of control.
MUD
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the
tires and is very difficult to get through. You should use
DRIVE, with the transfer case in the 4L position to main-
tain your momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try
turning your steering wheel no more than a quarter turn
quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud
holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and
getting stuck. They are normally full of debris from pre-
vious vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before
entering any mud hole, get out and determine how
deep it is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the
vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck.
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
4
SAND
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail,
maintain your vehicle's momentum and do not stop.
The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate
tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt
maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle's momentum. If
you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or
dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of
15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area.
Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your trac-
tion and handling while driving on the soft sand, but
you must return the tires to normal air pressure before
driving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure
you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing
the pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce
your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other
High Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different
types of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path
ahead to determine the correct approach and your abil-
ity to safely recover the vehicle if something goes
wrong. Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring
the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle
forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and
ease the vehicle up and over the object.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle.
USING A SPOTTER
There are many times where it is hard to see the
obstacle or determine the correct path. Determining the
correct path can be extremely difficult when you are
confronting many obstacles. In these cases have some-
one guide you over, through, or around the obstacle.
Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you
where they can see the obstacle, watch your tires and
undercarriage, and guide you through.
CROSSING LARGE ROCKS
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest of them with your
tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle.
The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the
side wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look
ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks
with your tires.
CAUTION!
•
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
•
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
CROSSING A RAVINE, GULLY, DITCH, WASH-
OUT OR RUT
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large
rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
vehicle's mobility. Approach these obstacles at a
45-degree angle and let each tire go through the
obstacle independently. You need to use caution when
crossing large obstacles with steep sides. Do not
attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at
an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a
rollover. If you get caught in a rut, dig a small trench to
the right or left at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front
tires. Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the
turnout you just created. You should now be able to
drive out following the trench you just created at a
45-degree angle.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
CROSSING LOGS
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approxi-
mately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to
be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb
the log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake
and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from
under your tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using
your brakes.
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high-centered.
GETTING HIGH-CENTERED
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get
out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle
is hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and
what is the best direction to recover the vehicle.
Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the
vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the
weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle
down. You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching
the vehicle off the object.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under-
standing of your abilities and your vehicle's limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too
steep to climb and should not be attempted. You should
always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities.
You should always climb hills straight up and down.
Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
BEFORE CLIMBING A STEEP HILL
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the trac-
tion is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and
down? What is on top and the other side? Are there
ruts, rocks, branches or other obstacles on the path?
Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes
wrong? If everything looks good and you feel confident,
shift the transmission into a lower gear with 4L
engaged, and proceed with caution, maintaining your
momentum as you climb the hill.
DRIVING UP HILL
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle
up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an
easy constant throttle and apply more power as you
start up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade;
the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose
control. If the front end begins to bounce, ease off the
throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the
ground. As you approach the crest of the hill, ease off
the throttle and slowly proceed over the top. If the
wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill,
ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turn-
ing the steering wheel no more than a quarter turn
quickly back and forth. This will provide a fresh "bite"
into the surface and will usually provide enough trac-
tion to complete the climb. If you do not make it to the
top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight
down the grade using engine resistance along with the
vehicle brakes.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in
severe injury.
DRIVING DOWNHILL
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine
if it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow, con-
trolled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight
descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the
hill to regain control if the vehicle descends too fast? If
you feel confident in your ability to proceed, then make
sure you are in 4L and proceed with caution. Allow
engine braking to control the descent and apply your
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured or killed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
4
DRIVING ACROSS AN INCLINE
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle's abilities. Driving across
an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels,
which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or
rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with
firm and stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline
at an angle heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a roll-
over, which may result in severe injury.
IF YOU STALL OR BEGIN TO LOSE HEADWAY
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and
shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing
engine braking to control the descent and apply your
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping
and rolling the vehicle, which may result in severe
injury. Always back carefully straight down a hill in
REVERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using
only the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally across
a hill, always drive straight up or down.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of
water. Water crossings should be avoided, if possible,
and only be attempted when necessary in a safe,
responsible manner. You should only drive through
areas which are designated and approved. You should
tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment. You
should know your vehicle's abilities and be able to
recover it if something goes wrong. You should never
stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water
unless you ingested water into the engine air intake. If
the engine stalls, do not attempt to restart it. Determine
if it has ingested water first. The key to any crossing is
low and slow. Shift into FIRST gear (manual transmis-
sion), or DRIVE (automatic transmission), with the
transfer case in the 4L position and proceed very slowly
with a constant slow speed (3 to 5 mph {5 to 8 km/h}
maximum) and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving;
do not try to accelerate through the crossing. After
crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle
differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids
for signs of water ingestion.
CAUTION!
•
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, trans-
fer case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you
drive too fast or through too deep of water. Water
can cause permanent damage to engine, driveline
or other vehicle components, and your brakes will
be less effective once wet and/or muddy.
•
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before enter-
ing as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward.
Driving through water may cause damage that may
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
BEFORE YOU CROSS ANY TYPE OF WATER
As you approach any type of water, you need to deter-
mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If neces-
sary, get out and walk through the water or probe it with
a stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach
angle, current and bottom condition. Be careful of
murky or muddy waters; check for hidden obstacles.
Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife, and
you can recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a
safe crossing is the water depth, current and bottom
conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in,
effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be
sure to consider this when determining the depth and
the ability to safely cross.
CROSSING PUDDLES, POOLS, FLOODED
AREAS OR OTHER STANDING WATER
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas
normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water
types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it
difficult to determine an accurate water depth,
approach angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy
water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps
prior to entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and
easier vehicle recovery. If you are able to determine you
can safely cross, than proceed using the low and slow
method.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec-
tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
CROSSING DITCHES, STREAMS, SHALLOW
RIVERS OR OTHER FLOWING WATER
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never
attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in
shallow water. Fast moving water can easily push your
vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control. Even in
very shallow water, a high current can still wash the dirt
out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle
in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal injury
and vehicle damage with slower water currents in
depths greater than the vehicle's running ground clear-
ance. You should never attempt to cross flowing water
which is deeper than the vehicle's running ground clear-
ance. Even the slowest current can push the heaviest
vehicle downstream and out of control if the water is
deep enough to push on the large surface area of the
vehicle's body. Before you proceed, determine the
speed of the current, the water's depth, approach
angle, bottom condition and if there are any obstacles.
Then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using
the low and slow technique.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at
risk of injury or drowning.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle
than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it
is always a good idea to check for damage. That way
you can get any problems taken care of right away and
have your vehicle ready when you need it.
•
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension,
driveline, and exhaust system for damage.
•
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean
as required.
•
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque
to the values specified in the Service Manual.
•
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide dam-
age to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
•
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes
inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual trans-
mission bell housing for mud and debris and clean
as required.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to pre-
vent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
•
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels
for impacted material. Impacted material can cause
a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
4
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5/5 NAV
With 12.3-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect
Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features
in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communica-
tions. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve
over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. As
always, if you experience unusual behavior, contact an
authorized dealer immediately,
page 298, or refer
to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for addi-
tional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
•
ONLY insert trusted media devices/components
into your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possi-
bility for vehicle systems to be breached.
•
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, contact an authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features, sta-
bility, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located
on the center of the instrument panel. These buttons
allow you to access and change the Customer Program-
mable Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instru-
ment panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER con-
trol knob located on the right side. Turn the control
knob to scroll through menus and change settings.
Push the center of the control knob one or more times
to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap
the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURES
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings
button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to
access programmable features.
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12.3-inch Display Touchscreen And
Faceplate Buttons
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
166
NOTE:
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
•
All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, only press one button at a
time to enter the desired menu. Once in the desired
menu, press and release the preferred setting option
until a check mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Once the setting is com-
plete, press the X button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down
Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will display in the chosen
language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are
“English”, “Français”, and “Español”.
MULTIMEDIA 167
5
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The
available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the
system automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
Display Brightness With Headlights
ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be
set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights
OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be
set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Keyboard This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable keyboards are “ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY
Keyboard”, and “AZERTY Keyboard”.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five seconds or stay open until manually
closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Auto Launch with Off-Road+ This setting will determine how the Off-Road feature is launched through the radio when turning the vehicle on. The
options are “Off”, “Forward Camera” (if equipped), and “Off Road Pages”.
SiriusXM Travel Link Weather Alerts This setting will turn the weather alerts on or off.
168 MULTIMEDIA
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in the instrument
cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom The setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK],
L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened
audio description from the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will always show the Command List. The
“With Help” setting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never”
setting will turn the Command List off.
MULTIMEDIA 169
5
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time And Format/Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be Off for this setting to be available.
The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Time Hours This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting
will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” set-
ting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Front Camera Gridlines This setting will turn the Front Camera Gridlines on or off.
170 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ
depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the
available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will
have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will
have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The
“Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” set-
ting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
ParkSense This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and can provide both an audible
chime and a visual display when an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Blind Spot Alert This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will
turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights &
Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Front Camera Gridlines This setting will turn the Front Camera Gridlines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 171
5
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
•
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
172 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn
when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The
“2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key
Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The
“Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will
unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked to the key fob.
MULTIMEDIA 173
5
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems
When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote
start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will
only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems when-
ever the vehicle is started.
AUX Switches
When the AUX button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
AUX 1-4 This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX switches. There are two types: “Latching” and
“Momentary”. The power source for the AUX switches can either be set to run off the “Battery” or from the “Ignition”. In
addition to setting the type and power source, you can set if the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the AUX
switches were set. The Recalled Last State setting can be set to “On” or “Off”. Last state conditions are met only if the
type is set to Latching and the power source is set to Ignition.
174 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate
when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Doors On Engine Off Power Delay This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned on. When any door is opened, the elec-
tronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Doors Off Key Off Power Delay This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the elec-
tronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the vehicle has been turned off. The
“+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will automatically lower the vehicle ride height for easier entry and exit of the vehicle.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon
can be moved to set audio location.
MULTIMEDIA 175
5
Setting Name Description
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle
speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smart-
phone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Mes-
sage” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Projection Manager This setting will activate your smartphone to project on the vehicle’s touchscreen.
176 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific
radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
•
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Star t This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Reset/Restore Default Settings
When the Reset/Restore Default Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default
settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button
can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system, including Bluetooth®
devices and presets.
MULTIMEDIA 177
5
System Information
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system, including Bluetooth®
devices and presets.
178 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand con-
trol is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode:
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within the
vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If
your radio performance does not satisfactorily improve
from repositioning the mobile phone, it is recom-
mended that the volume be turned down or off during
mobile phone operation when not using the Uconnect
system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
INFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure
limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or
further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scien-
tific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard air-
planes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encour-
aged to ask for authorization before turning on the wire-
less radio.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages, it will
provide you vehicle status information while operating
on off-road conditions. It supplies information relating
to the status of the drivetrain, transfer case, coolant/oil
gauges, pitch and roll of the vehicle, and access to the
trailcam system.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Off Road button
on the touchscreen, and then press “Launch Off-Road”.
Remote Sound System Controls
MULTIMEDIA 179
5
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information con-
cerning the dynamics of the vehicle.
The following information is displayed:
•
Steering angle in degrees
•
Status of Transfer Case
•
Status of the Rear Axle
•
Status of the Front Axle
•
Status of the Sway Bar
ACCESSORY GAUGE
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current status
of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature,
Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only), Transmission Tem-
perature (Automatic Transmissions Only), and Battery
Voltage.
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side)
in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a visualiza-
tion of the current vehicle angle.
TRAILCAM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that
allows you to see an on-screen image of the front view
of your vehicle. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
To activate, press the TrailCam button on the
touchscreen.
Vehicle Dynamics Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Steering Angle
2—SwayBar
3 — Transfer Case Status
4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
5 — Front Axle Locker Status
Accessory Gauges Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Oil Temperature
2 — Coolant Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
4 — Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmis-
sions Only)
5 — Battery Voltage
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
TrailCam Activation
180 MULTIMEDIA
TRAIL RECORDING — IF EQUIPPED
Overview
The Trail Recording feature can be accessed from a
variety of different ways: Within the Vehicle Dashboard
screen, from the App Drawer menu, within the Off-Road
Pages Vehicle Dynamics tab, or from the Start Record-
ing feature within the Adventure Guides app. There will
be options within “Trail Recording” where you can start
recording your trail or view saved recordings where you
can see previous trails recorded.
Recording A Trail And Stop Recording
To start recording a trail, select “Start Recording”
towards the bottom of the touchscreen. Once selected,
your trail will start recording for as long as desired.
When the trail is over, press “Stop Recording”. Select
whether to save the trail in which the trail will be saved
and will appear in “Saved Recordings”. Selecting “Can-
cel” will not save the trail, and the trail will be deleted.
NOTE:
After 30 miles (48 km) a notification will appear on the
touchscreen asking if you want to keep recording.
Adding a Waypoint
On the bottom left-hand side of the touchscreen select
“Add Waypoint” from the trail recording screen. This will
allow the user to pin a location along the trail, both dur-
ing and after the recording. There are three selectable
options to mark a Waypoint: A Waypoint can be placed
whether the vehicle is in or out of motion, but can only
be edited when the vehicle is not moving. As a default,
Waypoints are named chronologically in the order in
which the Waypoints are marked or added. They can be
renamed later by pressing the edit icon located to the
right of the defaulted Waypoint name.
•
Places
•
Obstacle
•
Guidance
NOTE:
A Waypoint can be placed whether or not the vehicle is
in motion, but can only be edited when the vehicle is
not moving.
Expand/Collapse View
While in the Trail Recording screen, press the Expand
button located to the right of the Map View to enlarge
the Trail Map screen during recordings. Once in
expanded view, press the collapse icon which will
shrink the trail map during screen recordings.
Editing A Trail
After finishing recording a trail, there will be a scale to
rate the difficulty of the trail for future reference. The
scale is from 1-10 with one being the easiest and
10 being the most difficult.
NOTE:
Setting the difficulty is not required to save the trail and
can be edited afterwards.
Editing/Deleting a Waypoint
To edit a Waypoint, select the desired Waypoint on the
map. Once selected, choose the type of Waypoint. Once
selected, choose a sub-type that describes the Way-
point. Waypoint sub-types are listed in the following
table:
Places Obstacles Guidance
Camping Mud Bare Left
Scenic View Rock Bare Right
Staging Area Sand Dead End
Trailhead Steep Ascent Hard Left
Water Steep Descent Hard Right
Water Slow
Route Closure
Waypoints can be renamed later by pressing the pencil
icon located to the right of the defaulted Waypoint
name. Selecting the pencil icon will bring up a keyboard
which will allow you to customize the Waypoint name.
NOTE:
Editing Waypoints is not available while the vehicle is in
motion. To edit and customize Waypoints the vehicle
must not be in motion.
If you want to Delete a Waypoint, select the Waypoint
that you created and press the delete Waypoint button
located towards the bottom of your touchscreen. The
pop-up, “Your waypoint was deleted successfully” will
appear on your touchscreen once the Waypoint was
successfully deleted.
MULTIMEDIA 181
5
Saving And Canceling A Trail
When finished editing a trail select “Save”. The trail will
be stored in the Saved Recordings tab.
Selecting “Cancel” will delete the trail, and a pop-up
screen will appear asking if you are sure that you want
to cancel your current trail recording. Selecting “No,
Don’t Cancel”, or the X button, will take you back to the
Waypoint editing screen. Selecting “Yes, Cancel” will
discard the selected trail recording.
Saved Trails
To view previously saved trails, click the Saved Record-
ings button on the Trail Recording home page. Once
entering Saved Recordings, a list of previously saved
trails will be listed. The Remove Icon button to the far
right of each trail will delete the trail. To delete all trails
select “Delete All” towards the bottom of the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
Saved recordings can be accessed even once the Jeep
connected services subscription has expired.
After selecting a saved recording, options will be avail-
able to view, edit, delete, or export the recording onto a
USB device. Pressing “View Performance Data” will
showcase the vehicle’s pitch, roll, altitude, and location
for each selected Waypoint. A Snapshot feature is avail-
able, where a photo of the performance data can be
exported to a connected USB device.
Export a Recording onto a USB
After selecting a saved recording, press the Export but-
ton towards the bottom of the touchscreen and select
the USB icon option. There will be a pop-up message
afterwards stating whether or not the export was
successful.
ADVENTURE GUIDES — IF EQUIPPED
To access the Adventure Guides feature, press the
Vehicle icon on the lower menu bar of your touch-
screen. From the Vehicle Dashboard, press “Adventure
Guides”.
To search for an off-road trail:
1. Press the search box and enter an address or
keyword.
NOTE:
○
An active subscription to Jeep Connect con-
nected services is required to access the Adven-
ture Guides feature. If you do not have an active
subscription, click the Register button on the
touchscreen and follow the prompts.
○
If there is no network connection, a message will
display on your touchscreen, “Data connection
temporarily not available. Please try again later.”
Press “OK”, and ensure there is a stable network
connection.
○
If there are no search results within the area in
which you added the address or keyword, the
message “No Results Found” will display on your
touchscreen.
2. The distance to each search result will appear on
the left of each destination. The difficulty level of
each trail will show towards the right of each desti-
nation. Select the trail you wish to navigate to.
NOTE:
○
Press the Map View button to view an expanded
summary of each trail and its difficulty level.
Search For An Off-Road Trail
Trail Difficulty
Map View Button
182 MULTIMEDIA
3. Press the Preview Trail button to view the trail info.
Press the Start Recording button which will bring
you to the Trail Recording app landing page where
you will be able to save the recording, view saved
recordings, and see the distance to your destination.
NOTE:
Pressing the Back arrow on the Trail Info page will
bring you back to the trail detail screen.
4. Press the “Go Here” button which will send the
directions to your TomTom Navigation system.
5. If the trail does not exist within your Uconnect sys-
tem’s local memory, press the Download button. If
the trail already exists, meaning it has already been
downloaded at some point, press the Check For
Updates button.
The following are the different pages that are unique to
each Trail Info page:
NOTE:
•
Highlights: Provides general information on the trail
name, trails difficulty range, and experience icons.
•
Advanced Rating System: Provides information
such as recommended vehicle for the trail and a
“Concerns” tab that provides information about
what to be prepared for when driving on the
selected trail. Only the Concerns that are highlighted
are applicable to the trail.
•
Technical Rating: Provides a brief description of the
trail as well as a “Mandatory” rating and an
“Optional” rating. Next to each rating is an “i” icon
that provides a rating legend for trail difficulty with
1 being the easiest and 10 being the most difficult.
•
Waypoints: The last page provides information on
different Waypoints along the trail such as distance
from selected Waypoint and navigation routes to
other Waypoints along the trail.
NOTE:
•
“Trail Updated Successfully” will display towards the
top of your touchscreen if the trail update was com-
pleted properly. If “Trail could not update. Not
enough space” appears, you will need to clear up
space under your “Downloaded Trails” by removing
trails that are no longer needed or desired. “No
Updates available” means the trail you have
selected is up-to-date.
•
Pressing “X” on any of these screens will take you
back to the trail details screen.
Trails Near You
The Trails Near You feature will show the first 20 trails
based on 500 miles (805 km) within your current vehi-
cle’s location.
NOTE:
If there are no trails within a 500-mile (805-km) radius
within your current vehicle’s location, “No Results
Found” will appear on your touchscreen.
Expanded Trail Difficulty View
Preview Trail
Go Here Navigation Button
MULTIMEDIA 183
5
Preloaded Trails
Press “Preloaded Trails” to see a list of trails that are
preloaded onto your Uconnect system.
NOTE:
“Preloaded Trails” cannot be deleted from the list, as
they are the default trails that remain on your system
permanently.
Downloaded Trails
Any trail that you wish to download, press the Download
button on the trail you have selected.
NOTE:
•
“Trail Downloaded Successfully” will display towards
the top of your touchscreen if the trail was down-
loaded properly. Once the download has been suc-
cessful, “Check for updates” will be available if you
wish to check the trail for updates.
•
“Downloaded Trails Full. Free up some space” will
display towards the top of your touchscreen if there
is not enough space. Press the Downloaded Trails
button to remove existing trails.
Press the Remove icon to remove a trail from the list.
You will be presented with a confirmation, “Are you sure
you want to delete this trail?”. Press “Yes” to show the
selected trail was deleted successfully, or press “No” or
the X button which will bring you back to the Down-
loaded Trails list.
Go All Access
Selecting the “Go All Access” button on the main Adven-
ture Guides page will display the Manage Account
screen. On this screen you can purchase an All Access
membership which provides the entire catalog of
offroad trails. A QR code will be present on the screen
to purchase a All Access membership.
NOTE:
If a trail has a grayed out icon to the far right, that indi-
cates that an All Access membership is required in
order to view the trail.
Preloaded Trails
Remove Downloaded Trails
184 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The sys-
tem automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances
vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal charac-
teristics when ABS activates:
•
The ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
•
Brake pedal pulsations
•
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
NOTE:
The ABS is designed to function with the Original Equip-
ment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may result
in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
•
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interference can
cause possible loss of Anti-Lock Braking capability.
Installation of such equipment should be per-
formed by qualified professionals.
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT
(RSRA)
RSRA alerts you through a visual and auditory notifica-
tion of the possible presence of an object, passenger,
or pet in the rear seats if a rear door was opened up to
10 minutes before the ignition was placed in the
ON/RUN position. RSRA does not directly detect
objects, passengers, or pets in the rear seats. When the
previous conditions are met, RSRA displays the mes-
sage “Check Rear Seat” on the instrument cluster dis-
play and sounds an auditory alert upon the driver plac-
ing the ignition in the OFF position to exit the vehicle.
To enable or disable RSRA, see
page 166.
185
6
WARNING!
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a com-
plete stop, then shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and apply the parking brake.
•
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL
(EBC) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic
Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System
(TCS). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Rain Brake
Support (RBS), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Selec-Speed
Control (SSC), and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is
not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake application, and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by applying the
brakes very quickly, creating the most efficient braking
assistance possible. To receive the benefit of the sys-
tem, you must apply continuous braking pressure dur-
ing the stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is
no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the
safety of others.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent over-
slip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitor-
ing the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of
the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
186 SAFETY
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” mode
(if equipped). Refer to
page 186 in this section for
a complete explanation of the available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot pre-
vent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that
involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
gerous manner which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The ESC system enhances directional control and sta-
bility of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to counteract these conditions. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
•
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to
the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteract-
ing the oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the Trac-
tion Control System (TCS) is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to
the steering system, suspension, braking system,
tire type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and
unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in
this mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used
for specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for acti-
vation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
turn off.
SAFETY 187
6
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push
and release of the button will toggle the ESC modes. Mul-
tiple attempts may be required to return to “ESC On”.
WARNING!
•
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
reduced.
•
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To
enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC OFF
button for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with
the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will
sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and
the “ESC OFF” message will display in the instrument
cluster. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off”
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
If equipped with Off Road+ and if Off Road+ is active
when "Full Off" mode is enabled by the driver, ESC will
not switch to "Partial Off" mode at any speed and will
remain in "Full Off" mode until Off Road+ is exited or
ESC is re-enabled by the driver.
WARNING!
•
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off”
mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only.
•
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode. It should go out with the engine run-
ning. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal-
function has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC sys-
tem becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel-
eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
•
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode.
•
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned
off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a
reduced mode.
188 SAFETY
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will con-
tinue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If
the driver does not apply the throttle before this time
expires, the system will release brake pressure and the
vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
•
The feature must be enabled.
•
The vehicle must be stopped.
•
The parking brake must be off.
•
The driver door must be closed. (If the doors are
attached, then the door must be closed. If the doors
are detached then the driver's seat belt must be
buckled.)
•
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
•
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direc-
tion (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
•
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmis-
sion is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped
with a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed,
HSA will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such
as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pull-
ing a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road con-
ditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, see
page 166 for further
information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
•
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deacti-
vated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be
enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle
and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is
released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually activate the
trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure
prior to releasing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the park-
ing brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be
certain to place the transmission in PARK.
•
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a col-
lision or serious personal injury.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet condi-
tions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake
pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers
are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver interaction is
required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the
driver. The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will pre-
pare the brake system for a panic stop.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off-road driving in 4WD
Low only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by
actively controlling engine torque and
brakes.
SAFETY 189
6
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overrid-
ing with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the fol-
lowing conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
•
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
•
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
•
The parking brake is released.
•
The driver seat belt is buckled.
•
The driver is not applying throttle.
•
The driver door is closed (If doors are attached, the
door must be closed. If doors are detached, then
driver seat belt must be buckled).
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once
the following conditions are met:
•
The driver releases the throttle.
•
The driver releases the brake.
•
The transmission is in any selection other than
PARK.
•
Your vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
•
The driver door is closed (If doors are attached, the
door must be closed. If doors are detached, then
driver seat belt must be buckled).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and
can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally,
the SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a
grade and the level of set speed reduction depends on
the magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the
SSC set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
•
1st=0.6mph(1km/h)
•
2nd=1.2mph(2km/h)
•
3rd=1.8mph(3km/h)
•
4th=2.5mph(4km/h)
•
5th=3.1mph(5km/h)
•
6th=3.7mph(6km/h)
•
7th=4.3mph(7km/h)
•
8th=5mph(8km/h)
•
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) — if equipped
•
REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
•
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
•
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
SSC Target Set Speeds — If Equipped With Off Road+
•
1st=0.6mph(1km/h)
•
2nd=0.9mph(1.5km/h)
•
3rd=1.2mph(2km/h)
•
4th = 1.5 mph (2.5 km/h)
•
5th=1.8mph(3km/h)
•
6th=2.5mph(4km/h)
•
7th=3.7mph(6km/h)
•
8th=5mph(8km/h)
•
REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
•
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
•
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
•
During SSC, the +/- gear selector input is used for
SSC target speed selection but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. While actively con-
trolling SSC, the transmission will shift appropriately
for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding
driving conditions.
•
SSC operation is influenced by Off Road+ drive
mode if active. The differences may be notable to
the driver as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of
the following conditions occur:
•
The driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
•
The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
•
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the follow-
ing conditions occur:
•
The driver pushes the SSC switch.
•
The driveline is shifted out of the 4WD Low.
•
The parking brake is applied.
•
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
•
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h). SSC will exist immediately.
•
The driver door opens (Driver door opens if doors
are attached or driver seat belt is unbuckled if doors
are detached).
190 SAFETY
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
switch has a light that offers feedback to the driver
about the state SSC is in.
•
The cluster icon and switch light will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated.
These are the normal operating conditions for SSC.
•
The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
SSC switch but enabled conditions are not met.
•
The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
excess speed.
•
The cluster icon and switch light will flash then extin-
guish when SSC deactivates due to overheated
brakes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when driving in off-road conditions. The
driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ-
ential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited slip differen-
tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro-
priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to
page 152 for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power
may be reduced, and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC sys-
tem is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The
zone starts at the outside rearview mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
areas.
Rear Detection Zones
SAFETY 191
6
NOTE:
•
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
•
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change
if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the
trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equip-
ment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in the BSM Warning Light remaining illu-
minated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward
gear. See
page 166 for more information.
•
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi-
ence dropouts (blinking on and off) of the side mir-
ror warning indicator lights when a motorcycle or any
small object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud,
or other road contaminations accumulate on the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located.
The system may also detect a blockage if the vehicle is
operated in areas with extremely low radar returns,
such as a desert, or parallel to a large elevation drop. If
a blockage is detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily
Unavailable, Wipe Rear Corners” message will display in
the instrument cluster, both mirror lights will illuminate,
and BSM and RCP alerts will be disabled. This is normal
operation. The system will automatically resume func-
tion when the condition clears. To minimize system
blockage, do not block the area of the rear fascia/
bumper where the radar sensors are located with for-
eign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.) and
keep it clear of road contaminations.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding
an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
See
page 194 for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driv-
ing to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will
issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a
relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
BSM Radar Location (Left Side Shown)
Warning Light Location
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
192 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the
warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in
speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foli-
age, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may
alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adja-
cent lanes
page 302.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The RCP feature is intended to aid the driver when
backing out of parking spaces where their vision of
oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of
the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a
clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming
vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sen-
sors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
Opposing Traffic
RCP Detection Zones
SAFETY 193
6
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver
detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation.
Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when
using RCP. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation
that are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM sys-
tem will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If
the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the
same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on)
will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP mode, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is also muted. The RCP state
always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
Door Removal
When either the front driver or passenger door is
removed, the instrument cluster will display “Blind Spot
Temporarily Unavailable” and the BSM system will dis-
able. While the system will continue to indicate what-
ever blind spot mode it was previously in within the
Uconnect system, no visual or audible alerts will be pro-
vided. As long as the doors are removed, the instru-
ment cluster will provide the “Blind Spot Temporarily
Unavailable” pop up as a reminder that the system is
disabled every time the ignition is cycled.
Upon re-installation of both doors, the system will
resume functionality based on the personalized mode
selected.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING
(FCW) WITH MITIGATION —
IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver
when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warn-
ings and limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings as well as a possible brake jerk
warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these pro-
gressive warnings, then the system will provide a lim-
ited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide the maxi-
mum braking possible to mitigate the potential forward
collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitiga-
tion event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
194 SAFETY
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
•
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
•
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other
than vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based
on the course prediction. This is expected and is a
part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
•
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking
events within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking
portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next igni-
tion cycle.
•
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to
the surroundings
page 302.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon-
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning
could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display in
the control settings. See
page 166 for further infor-
mation.
•
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward colli-
sion button once.
•
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward colli-
sion button once.
NOTE:
•
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front.
•
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system
from warning the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”, “FCW
OFF" will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
•
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this pre-
vents the system from providing limited active brak-
ing, or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
•
When FCW status is set to “Warning and Braking”,
this allows the system to warn the driver of a pos-
sible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings and it applies autonomous braking.
•
The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full On” from
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned
off, it will reset to “Full On” when the vehicle is
restarted.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are pro-
grammable through the Uconnect system
page 166.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting
and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warn-
ings and it applies autonomous braking.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Far", the system
provides possible collision warnings on objects farther
away. This results in earlier warnings and provides the
most reaction time to avoid possible collisions.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Near", the sys-
tem provides possible collision warnings on objects
closer to the vehicle. This results in later warnings and
provides less reaction time than the "Far" and "Medium"
settings, which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
FCW Message
SAFETY 195
6
NOTE:
•
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” pre-
vents the system from providing limited active brak-
ing, or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision, but maintains the audible and visual
warnings.
•
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the sys-
tem from providing autonomous braking, or addi-
tional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
•
The system will retain the last setting selected by
the driver after ignition shut down.
•
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are
far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with
the same or higher rates of speed.
•
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condi-
tion that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle
is still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the condition
that limited the system performance is no longer pres-
ent, the system will return to its full performance state.
If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
•
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
•
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal condi-
tions, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
If Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) system which provides the driver with audible
warnings and visual warnings, in the instrument cluster
display. It may apply limited automatic braking when it
detects a potential frontal collision with a
pedestrian/cyclist.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph
(62 km/h), the system may provide maximum braking
to mitigate the potential collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist. If the PEB event stops the vehicle completely,
the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two
seconds and then release the brakes. When the system
determines a collision with the pedestrian/cyclist in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect
every type of potential collision with a pedestrian. The
driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Fail-
ure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury
or death.
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the sys-
tem to warn you of a possible frontal collision with the
pedestrian.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the
Control settings
page 166.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian Emer-
gency Braking button.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning
Active Braking button.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the sys-
tem, so no warning or active braking will be available in
case of a possible frontal collision with the
pedestrian/cyclist.
PEB Message
196 SAFETY
NOTE:
The PEB system will retain the last setting selected by
the driver after ignition shut down. The system will not
reset to the default setting when the vehicle is
restarted.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The alert warning on the cluster will stay on until the
tire is inflated to the placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases,
the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should
always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
See
page 273 on how to properly inflate the vehi-
cle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recom-
mended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pres-
sure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure
to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for
the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pres-
sure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is
68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on
the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on.
In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor is
not designed for use on aftermarket wheels, and
may contribute to a poor overall system perfor-
mance. Customers are encouraged to use Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to ensure
TPMS feature operation.
•
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will pre-
vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a
tire failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure, unless
your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Fill Alert (TFA)
system.
SAFETY 197
6
•
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire
pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
Warning Light.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire
page 302.
System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wire-
less technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sen-
sors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted
to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire pres-
sure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING LOW PRES-
SURE WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound
when tire pressure is low in one or more of
the four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low" message for
a minimum of five seconds, an "Inflate to XX" message
and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire
with the low tire pressure values in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a differ-
ent color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehi-
cle’s recommended cold placard pressure value as
shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the pressure values in the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to
their original color, and the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
"SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM" message for a mini-
mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is
not being received.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure Warning
198 SAFETY
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, pro-
viding the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer
flash, and the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” mes-
sage will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
•
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
•
Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
•
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
•
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
•
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
Vehicles With A Full-Size Matching Spare
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System sensor, and can be moni-
tored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) when swapped with a low pressure road tire.
2. In the event that the matching full-size spare tire is
swapped with a low pressure road tire, the next igni-
tion switch cycle will still show the TPMS Warning
Light to be on, a chime to sound, an “Inflate to XX”
message to appear in the instrument cluster, and
the graphic display will still show the low tire pres-
sure value in a different color.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) will turn off the TPMS Warning
Light as long as none of road tires are below the low
pressure warning threshold.
TIRE FILL ALERT
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire
Fill Alert feature in the apps menu of the Uconnect
system.
NOTE:
•
Only one tire can be filled at a time when using the
Tire Fill Alert system.
•
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS system fault is set to “active” or if the
system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system detects
an increase in tire pressure while filling the tire. The
ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode with the trans-
mission in PARK for vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, the parking brake must be
applied.
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to enter
Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is
in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lamps do not come
on while inflating the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) sensor may be in an inoperative posi-
tion, preventing the TPMS sensor signal from being
received. In this case, the vehicle may need to be
moved slightly forward or backward.
The Tire Fill Alert system will only inflate or deflate one
tire at a time. Wait until the hazard lights have stopped
flashing for 30 seconds after the desired pressure is
achieved in one tire before switching to another.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Operation:
•
The horn will chirp once to let the user know when
to stop filling the tire, when it reaches recom-
mended pressure.
•
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overfilled
and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the
user continues to inflate the tire.
•
The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let
out to reach proper inflation level.
•
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then
underinflated and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.
NOTE:
The Tire Fill Alert feature is set to “Disabled” every time
the ignition is turned to “OFF”. To re-enable the Tire Fill
Alert feature at the next ignition “RUN” state, the cus-
tomer must re-enable the feature through use of the
customer settings in the radio.
SELECTABLE TIRE FILL ALERT — IF EQUIPPED
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an
optional feature that is included as part of the normal
Tire Fill Alert system. The system is designed to allow
you to select a pressure to inflate or deflate the vehi-
cle's front and rear axle tires to, and to provide feed-
back while inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is
located in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, you
will be able to select a pressure setting for both the
front and rear axle tire pressures by scrolling through a
pressure range from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for
each axle setting.
SAFETY 199
6
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for the
front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle placard
pressure label.
NOTE:
The Tire Fill Alert feature disables every time the igni-
tion is placed in the OFF position. The feature must be
re-enabled through the radio each time the ignition is
placed back in the ON/RUN position
page 166.
You may also store pressure values chosen for each
axle in the Uconnect system application as preset pres-
sure values. Up to two sets of preset pressure values
can be stored in the Uconnect system for the front and
rear axle. Once you select the tire pressures for the
front and rear axles that you want to inflate or deflate
to, you can begin inflating or deflating one tire at a
time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating
one tire at a time.
In order to use STFA, the Tire Fill Alert feature must be
enabled through the radio
page 166.
The system will be activated when the TPMS receiver
module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the transmission in
PARK in vehicles with an automatic transmission, and
in NEUTRAL with the parking brake engaged in vehicles
with a manual transmission. The hazard lamps will
come on to confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster. If the
hazard lamps do not come on while inflating or deflat-
ing the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor may be in an inoperative position, pre-
venting the TPMS sensor signal from being received. In
this case, the vehicle may need to be moved slightly
forward or backward.
The STFA system will only inflate or deflate one tire at a
time. Wait until the hazard lights have stopped flashing
for 30 seconds after the desired pressure is achieved
on one tire before switching to another.
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are
inflated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the follow-
ing STFA states:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected pressure
is reached to let you know when to stop inflating or
deflating the tire.
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overin-
flated or over-deflated.
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air is
added or removed to reach proper selected pres-
sure level.
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as
when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on
your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors. Then,
drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on. The instrument cluster will display the “SER-
VICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then dis-
play dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but dashes
(--) will remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then
display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the
next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYS-
TEM" message will no longer be displayed as long as no
system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
FEATURES
•
Seat Belt Systems
•
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
•
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
200 SAFETY
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly must be secured in the appropri-
ate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in
a rear seating position
page 218.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use
the proper child restraint
page 218.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
page 298 for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibil-
ity of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle
should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will sig-
nal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front
seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front pas-
senger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when
an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passen-
ger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder
Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts
are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
SAFETY 201
6
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is
traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin
until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoc-
cupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or
other items are placed on the outboard front passenger
seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or out-
board front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the
driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col-
lisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
•
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
take it to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
•
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
202 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so
that your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
•
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a colli-
sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect the
seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have questions
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
SAFETY 203
6
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immedi-
ately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded web-
bing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the
top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from your
neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release
the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will pre-
fer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and
if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoul-
der belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
•
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
•
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is com-
fortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
•
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
•
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
204 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
•
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the rec-
ommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front and second row outboard seat belt systems
are equipped with pretensioning devices that are
designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the
event of a collision. These devices may improve the per-
formance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner
or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front and second row outboard seat belt systems
are equipped with an Energy Management feature that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assem-
bly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint sys-
tem. For additional information, refer to
page 224.
The following figure illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
SAFETY 205
6
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Auto-
matic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indi-
cates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
gency) locking mode.
WARNING!
•
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
•
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or chil-
dren who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
Stow Clips Behind Rear Seat
Your vehicle is equipped with a stow clip on the lower
trim next to each of the rear seats. This clip is used to
hold the seat belt out of the path of the seatback when
it is being folded and opened. Only place the seat belt
webbing in this clip while folding and opening the seat.
Do not leave the webbing behind the clip when using
the belt to restrain an occupant.
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the rear
seat stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an
occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned prop-
erly on the occupant and they could be more seri-
ously injured in an accident as a result.
Rear Stow Clip
206 SAFETY
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
•
Supplemental Side Air Bags
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the
air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight sec-
onds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a mal-
function is detected that could affect the air bag sys-
tem. The diagnostics also record the nature of the mal-
function. While the air bag system is designed to be
maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air
bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemen-
tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a
single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has
been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately.
See
page 105 for more information regarding the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light.
SAFETY 207
6
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front air
bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint sys-
tems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center
of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-
partment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your
arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument
panel.
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system pro-
vides output appropriate to the severity and type of col-
lision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC), which may receive information from the front
impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) in the front passenger seat. The OCS is
designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occupant’s
seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and
for occupants whose seated weight classifies them in a
category other than a properly seated adult. This could
be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (“PAD”) Indicator Light
(an amber light located on the overhead sports bar)
tells the driver and front passenger when the Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indi-
cator Light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag will not deploy during a collision.
NOTE:
When the front passenger seat is empty or when very
light objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light
is NOT illuminated.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
208 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the
air bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col-
lisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional pro-
tection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear,
side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for example,
some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the infla-
tor units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated
to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper pas-
senger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size.
The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes
to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occupant’s
seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and
for occupants whose seated weight classifies them in a
category other than a properly seated adult. This could
be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Consists Of
The Following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
•
Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light –
an amber light located on the overhead sports
bar
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Passenger Seat Belt
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The
OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC
uses the classification to determine whether it should
activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated pas-
sengers are:
•
Sitting upright.
•
Facing forward.
•
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet com-
fortably on or near the floor.
•
Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
seat back in an upright position.
SAFETY 209
6
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
•
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects in it.
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-
facing child restraint.
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a child,
including a child seated in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat.
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a child or small adult.
•
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or
her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of
time.
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Advanced Air Bag Disabled
Indicator Light (“PAD”) Status
Front Passenger Air Bag Status
Unoccupied seat* Unbuckled NOT ILLUMINATED DEACTIVATED
Unoccupied seat* Buckled “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags, heavy briefcases, and other relatively light objects “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Rear-facing child restraint** “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster
seat**
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Small adult “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Properly seated adult NOT ILLUMINATED ACTIVATED
* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy
even though the PAD System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat
and never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Seated Properly
210 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indi-
cator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light (an amber light located on the overhead
sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger when
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated.
The PAD Indicator light illuminates the words “PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy during a colli-
sion. When the front passenger seat is empty or when
very light objects are placed on the seat and the seat
belt is unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag will not deploy even though the PAD indicator light
is NOT illuminated.
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when
an adult passenger is properly seated in the front pas-
senger seat. The driver and adult passenger should
verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated
when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat. If an
adult is not seated properly, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag may deactivate and the PAD Indicator
Light will be illuminated.
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be deacti-
vated for most properly seated and restrained children
in the passenger seat and for most properly installed
child restraint systems. However, under certain condi-
tions, even with a properly installed child restraint sys-
tem, the PAD Indicator Light may not be illuminated,
even though the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
deactivated. This can occur if the child restraint is
lighter than the lightest weight necessary to illuminate
the PAD Indicator Light. NEVER assume the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated unless the PAD
Indicator Light is illuminated with the words “PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG OFF.”
NOTE:
If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the PAD
Indicator Light will illuminate.
If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An Adult
Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger
seat and the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the pas-
senger may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps
below to allow the OCS to detect the adult passenger’s
seated weight to activate the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger
step out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger
seat, such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat mas-
sagers, blankets, extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of the
seat, with the passenger’s feet comfortably on or
near the floor, and with their back against the
seatback.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain
in this seated position for two to three minutes after
restarting the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for
an adult passenger, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately. Failure to
do so may cause serious injury or death. If the PAD
Indicator Light is illuminated with the words "PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG OFF," the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy in the event of a
collision.
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
•
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
SAFETY 211
6
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore,
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not
be activated for a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult (depending on size) who is seated in the
passenger seat. This does not mean that the OCS is
working improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the PAD
Indicator Light as a determination of whether the Pas-
senger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or deacti-
vated. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in
the front passenger seat, have the passenger reposi-
tion his or her body in the seat until the PAD Indicator
Light goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.
Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front Passenger’s
Seated Weight On The Front Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passen-
ger’s decreased or increased seated weight, which may
result in deactivation or activation of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not
mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in deactivation of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag causing serious injury or death.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in activation of the Pas-
senger Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of improper
front passenger seating include:
•
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or
instrument panel).
•
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
•
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
•
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
•
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
•
Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console.
•
Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
•
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
able classification. If an occupant in the front passen-
ger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide
an output signal to the OCS that is different from the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
212 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
•
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet com-
fortably on or near the floor.
•
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger
seat. Holding an object may provide an output sig-
nal to the OCS that is different than the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
The Air Bag Warning Light
will illuminate whenever
the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat
status.
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of
the air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or stays on after you start the
vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service immediately.
WARNING!
•
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air
bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does
not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is
first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle,
or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
•
Placing an object on the floor under the front pas-
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor under the front passenger seat.
•
If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain
deactivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates
that you should take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify
the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS
components must function as designed. Do not make
any modifications to the front passenger seat compo-
nents, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim
cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC
approved seat accessories may be used.
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
SAFETY 213
6
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the spe-
cific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
•
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
•
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
•
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
•
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover, or cushion may inadvertently
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or serious
injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not
comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
•
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
•
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on
a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at
a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
214 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other inju-
ries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in cer-
tain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Chil-
dren are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploy-
ing air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com-
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win-
dows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
•
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the deploy-
ment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the
side windows where the SABIC and its deployment
path are located should remain free from any
obstructions.
•
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air
Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occu-
pant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some
side collisions that do not impact the area of the pas-
senger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front
air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
•
Occupants, including children, who are up against
or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
should never lean on or sleep against the door,
side windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
•
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that
is appropriate for the size of the child.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SAFETY 215
6
WARNING!
•
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the cen-
ter of the seat.
•
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
•
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you prop-
erly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy
at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you
have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
•
Supplemental Side Air Bags
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
•
The air bag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the
air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are simi-
lar to friction rope burns or those you might get slid-
ing along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are not per-
manent and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if
you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-
like particles. The particles are a normal by-product
of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used
for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these par-
ticles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
•
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication net-
work remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
•
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped)
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System
•
Unlock the power door locks
216 SAFETY
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
these other functions in response to the Enhanced Acci-
dent Response System:
•
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
•
Cut off battery power to the:
○ Engine
○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
○ Electric power steering
○ Brake booster
○ Electric park brake
○ Automatic transmission gear selector
○ Horn
○ Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to place the ignition in the
STOP (OFF) position to avoid draining the battery. Care-
fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine com-
partment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or dam-
age to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights)
after an accident, reset the system by following the pro-
cedure described below. If you have any doubt, contact
an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem functions after an event, the ignition switch must
be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
system and starting the engine. After an accident, if the
vehicle will not start after performing the reset proce-
dure, the vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
to be inspected and to have the Enhanced Accident
Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to pro-
tect you. Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper pas-
senger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify
the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in
any way (including removal or loosening/tightening
of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabili-
ties, contact an authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in cer-
tain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
•
How far (if at all) the driver was pressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
SAFETY 217
6
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during
a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could be badly
injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for chil-
dren from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Cana-
da’s website for additional information:
https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
218 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rear-
ward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing for-
ward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in a
rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child
Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direc-
tion than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-
facing by children who have outgrown their infant car-
rier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-
positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit
properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
SAFETY 219
6
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident,
it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all
the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touch-
ing the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then
the child still needs to use a booster seat in this
vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check
seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can
move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt con-
tacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the cen-
ter of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) XX
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
220 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tether s For CHildren
(LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchor-
ages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seat-
ing Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 221
6
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint)
for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and
tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed
by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions?
Yes
You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors in the cen-
ter position. The inner anchorages are 19.2 inches (488 mm) apart.
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center
position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH
anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor-
ages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front pas-
senger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The center head restraint can be removed if it interferes with the
installation of the child restraint
page 42.
222 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback, adjacent to the
anchorage symbols on the seatback. They
are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the seatback
and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages located
behind each of the rear seats.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to
the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connec-
tion to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
and some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have
a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage
and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the
anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attach-
ments in the center seating position. Only install this
type of child restraint in the outboard seating positions.
Child restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower
attachments can be installed in any rear seating
position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You
can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehi-
cle’s seat belt for installing child seats in the out-
board positions.
Please
page 223 for typical installation
instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below.
page 224 to
check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise
the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in
the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
LATCH Anchorages
Tether Strap Anchorages
SAFETY 223
6
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
page 226 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor.
Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH sys-
tem, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and
out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter-
feres with the child restraint installation, instead of
buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they
should not play with them.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they
to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the web-
bing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
page 205 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections
for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For
Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
ALR – Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
224 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint)
for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward-
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a
forward-facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front pas-
senger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The center head restraint can be removed if it interferes with the
installation of the child restraint.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the
belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating posi-
tion. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the web-
bing to retract back into the retractor. As the web-
bing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, con-
nect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten
the tether strap. See
page 225 for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
SAFETY 225
6
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See
page 221 for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
The Top Tether anchorages are located behind each
rear seating position. To attach the tether strap of the
child restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back,
under the head restraint and to the tether anchor
directly behind the seat.
2. Release the seat back by pulling the release strap
located on the top of the seat back to provide room
to reach the tether anchor.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path between the anchorage and the child seat. The
tether strap should go between the head restraint
posts underneath the head restraint. You may need
to adjust the head restraint (if adjustable) to the
upward position to pass the tether strap underneath
the head restraint and between its posts.
4. Attach the hook to the wire anchorage on the cab
back wall (inside the opening labeled with the tether
anchorage symbol.)
5. Push the seat back rearward until the latch engages
and no red indicator is showing on the strap.
6. Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING!
•
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Tether Anchorage Locations
226 SAFETY
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possi-
bly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped)
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collec-
tion & Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio Instruction
Manual or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cyber-
security”
page 114.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the pos-
sible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
MAKE INSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding the seat belt or retractor condi-
tions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon
as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is removed. If the
light comes on intermittently or remains on while driv-
ing, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately
page 105.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should be
able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See
an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inop-
erable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the opera-
tion of the pedal assemblies. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedal
assemblies or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
•
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
•
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or
stack an additional floor mat on top of
an existing floor mat.
•
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved
floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of
your vehicle.
(Continued)
SAFETY 227
6
WARNING!
•
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
press the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any
pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the
floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
•
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
•
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
•
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interfer-
ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
•
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the
floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure
to the vehicle carpet. Fully press each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
•
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always
check your floor mat has been properly installed
and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU
SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE THE
VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper
cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instru-
ment panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in con-
fined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
•
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
•
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the
vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect
the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compart-
ment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
228 SAFETY
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal con-
ditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
SAFETY 229
6
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flash-
ers. When the button is activated, all directional turn
signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of
an emergency. Push the button a second time to turn
off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use only when
your vehicle is disabled or creating a safety hazard
warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers may
wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST
and an SOS button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
page 302.
•
The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built-in function.
These and other connected services will only be
operable if your Jeep Connect service is active and
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
•
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need
a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assis-
tance will know what vehicle you’re driving and its
location. Additional fees may apply for roadside
assistance.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Assist And SOS Buttons
1 — Assist Button
2 — SOS Button
230
•
Jeep Connect Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Jeep Connect.
•
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
•
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio,
Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call sys-
tem initiates a call to an SOS operator. To cancel the
SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button on
the overhead console or press the cancellation but-
ton on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS
Call will turn off the green LED light on the overhead
console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the overhead console will turn green
once a connection to an SOS operator has been
made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to an
SOS operator:
○
Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call.
○
The vehicle brand.
○
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
○
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
○
Once a connection is made between the vehi-
cle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the
SOS operator may be able to open a voice con-
nection with the vehicle to determine if addi-
tional help is needed. Once the SOS operator
opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS
Call system, the operator should be able to
speak with the vehicle occupants, and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s
SOS Call system will attempt to remain con-
nected with the SOS operator until the SOS
operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropri-
ate emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
•
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe
location.
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could pre-
vent operable network and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and GPS sig-
nal reception is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
•
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR
AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
•
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 231
7
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
•
The light located within the ASSIST and SOS buttons
will continuously be illuminated red.
•
The Device Screen will display the following mes-
sage “Vehicle device requires service. Please con-
tact an authorized dealer.”
•
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an autho-
rized dealer.”
WARNING!
•
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
•
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-
pant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
•
The ignition is in the OFF position
•
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
•
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
•
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash
•
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed
•
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
•
Operator error by the SOS operator
•
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
•
Weather
•
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that
your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your pro-
vided radio supplement for complete information.
232 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take the vehicle to a ser-
vice center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK (P), or a
manual transmission into REVERSE.
5. Cycle the ignition to OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if the
driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the pas-
senger’s rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked in position.
JACK LOCATION
The jack and tools are stored under the right rear seat.
Scan me
Wheel Blocked Example
Jack And Tool Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 233
7
See the following steps to remove:
1. Fold up the right rear seat.
2. Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then
slide the assembly out from under the seat.
3. Release the tool bag straps from the jack and
remove tools from bag.
4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
NOTE:
If the tailgate is lowered, the jack extension with hook
can be added to this assembly to enable lowering of the
spare tire without having to raise the tailgate.
CAUTION!
•
The lug wrench can only be attached to extension 2.
•
When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism
be sure the large flared end opening on extension
4 is positioned correctly over the winch mecha-
nism adjusting nut.
•
Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and winch
mechanism may occur from improper tool
assembly
Removing the Wing Bolt
Jack And Tool Bag
Jack And Tool Bag
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension Without Spring Clip 2
3 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 3
4 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 4
Assembled For Jack Operation
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension 2
3 — Long Extension 3
4 — Long Extension 4
5 — Short Extension With Hook
234 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration
or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other
objects in the vehicle may move around with force,
resulting in serious injury.
SPARE TIRE LOCATION AND
REMOVAL
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
truck. The spare tire is secured under the rear of the
vehicle with a winch and cable mechanism.
For spare tire removal, see the following steps:
1. Locate the winch access hole at the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with
the curved angle facing away from the vehicle.
Insert the extension tube through the access hole
between the lower tailgate and the top of the fascia/
bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.
3. Rotate the lug wrench handle counterclockwise until
the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable
slack to allow you to pull it out from under the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
Spare Tire Location
Access Hole Location
Winch Mechanism Tube
Inserting The Extensions Into The Winch Mechanism
Access Hole
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 235
7
4. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
5. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.
6. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
•
Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an auto-
matic transmission in PARK; a manual transmis-
sion to REVERSE.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely care-
ful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on loca-
tions other than those indicated.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the
stored location.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts (but do
not remove) by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the
jack handle driver to the extension, then to the lug
wrench.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
Removing The Retainer
Warning Label
236 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the
vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube, as
shown. Placement for the front and rear jacking
locations are critical. See the following images for
proper jacking locations. Do not raise the vehicle
until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
NOTE:
Keep the jack and tools aligned while raising the
vehicle to prevent tool damage.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure
that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts
and adjust the jack position as required.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clock-
wise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears
the ground surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Mount the spare tire on the axle.
Assembled Jack And Tools
Front Jack Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jack Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 237
7
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise, and remove the jack.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a
star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tight-
ened twice
page 293. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service
station.
11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are
properly seated against the wheel.
12. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.
13. Secure the jack and tools in their proper locations.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided.
TO STOW THE FLAT OR SPARE
See the following steps for stowing the flat or spare tire:
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing
upward and toward the rear of the vehicle for conve-
nience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position
it properly across the wheel opening.
3. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with
the curved angle facing away from the vehicle.
Insert the extension tubes through the access hole
between the lower tailgate and the top of the fascia/
bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the
wheel is drawn into place against the underside of
the vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the
winch mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It
cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire sev-
eral times to ensure it is firmly in place.
Reinstalling The Retainer
Winch Mechanism Access Hole
238 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
REINSTALLING THE JACK AND
TOOLS
1. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug
wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.
2. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position hold-
ing the jack by the jack turn-screw, place the jack
and tools under the rear seat.
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor
pan.
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration
or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools or bracket or other
objects in the vehicle may move around with force,
resulting in serious injury.
Reinstalling The Flat Or Spare Tire
Jack And Tool Bag
Jack Hold Down Wing Bolt
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 239
7
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improp-
erly, so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
WARNING!
•
Only use the positive battery post on the main bat-
tery to jump start your vehicle. Serious injury or
death could result if you attempt to jump start
using the supplemental battery.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting.
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of
the engine compartment.
NOTE:
The positive (+) battery post is covered with a protective
cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start system, it
will be equipped with two batteries
page 134.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK (P) (manual transmission in NEU-
TRAL) and place the ignition in OFF mode.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach,
apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition
is OFF.
Supplemental Battery — If Equipped
Positive (+) Battery Post – Gas Engine
240 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
•
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving
fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadver-
tent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle
while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine,
frame or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or
large bolt. The ground must be away from the bat-
tery and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnecting
procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the dis-
charged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the positive (+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
Jump Starting Label
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 241
7
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested
at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
•
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
•
Strong smell of coolant
•
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
•
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
In the event it is observed that the temperature gauge
is moving towards or close to the HOT (H) position, you
can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
•
On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmis-
sion in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine
idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
brakes.
•
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maxi-
mum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower
control to high. This allows the heater core to act as
a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing
heat from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air con-
ditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”
and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — IF EQUIPPED
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the trans-
mission will not shift out of Park (P) (such as a depleted
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the park-
ing brake before activating the Manual Park Release.
In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s seat
with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activat-
ing the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is
not secured by the parking brake, or by proper con-
nection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park
Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to seri-
ous injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
See the following steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
manual park release cover located in front of the
gear selector, to access the release tether strap.
3. Fish the tether strap up through the opening in the
console base.
Manual Park Release Cover
242 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Pull the tether strap until the release lever locks into
place in the vertical position. The vehicle is now out
of PARK (P) and can be moved. Release the parking
brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to
a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it from the
“locked” position.
2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever downward into
its original position.
3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console,
and reinstall the cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion, push and hold the lock button on the gear selec-
tor. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) (with automatic transmission) or FIRST(1)
gear and REVERSE (R) (with manual transmission),
while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least
amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain
the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or rac-
ing the engine.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEU-
TRAL(N) for more than 2 seconds, you must press
the brake pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE
(R).
•
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode,
before rocking the vehicle
page 187. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button
again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage,
or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for lon-
ger than 30 seconds continuously without stopping
when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tether Strap
Vertical Released Position
Original Tether Position
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 243
7
CAUTION!
•
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/FIRST gear and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be
towed as described on
page 158.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 4WD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
• Automatic Transmission in PARK (P)
• Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT in NEUTRAL)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
•Towinforward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufac-
turer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (P) in order to move the vehicle
page 242.
244 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
•
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
•
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA LLC US recommends towing with all wheels OFF
the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the for-
ward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the
transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is
in PARK (P) (for automatic transmissions) or in gear
( NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions)
page 158.
CAUTION!
•
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
•
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved
method of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed
truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are
mounted in the front and the rear fascia/bumpers.
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle trim level, rear tow hooks may
vary.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
•
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-
ing serious injury.
Front Tow Hooks
Rear Tow Hook
Rear Tow Hooks
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 245
7
CAUTION!
•
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Tow straps are recom-
mended when towing the vehicle, chains may
cause vehicle damage.
•
The tow hooks must not be used to move the
vehicle off the road or where there are obstacles.
•
Do not use the tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing.
•
Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehicle onto a
flatbed truck.
•
Do not use the tow hooks to free a stuck vehicle
page 243.
•
Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guide-
lines are not followed
page 244.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes
effect in the event of an impact
page 216.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data
that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s sys-
tems performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle
page 217.
246 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, or extremely
hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when
the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as pos-
sible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
On vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster dis-
play, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed and a
single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is
necessary.
On vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster
display, “Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster
odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that
an oil change is necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. To
reset the system follow the steps described
page 101.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally
only a concern for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
•
Check engine oil level.
•
Check windshield washer fluid level.
•
Check the tire pressures and look for unusual wear
or damage, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and fill as needed.
•
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
•
Change oil and filter.
•
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
•
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
•
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
•
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
•
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
•
Inspect exhaust system.
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
•
Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
247
8
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
OrYears:234567 8 9 10 111213 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X XXXXXXXX XXX X X
Inspect front suspension, rear suspension,
tie rod ends, and replace if necessary.
XX X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
necessary.
XX X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four wheel disc brakes.
XX X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine.
** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km),
whichever comes first.
XX
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
OrYears:234567 8 9 10 111213 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the manual transmission fluid if
using your vehicle for any of the following:
trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading,
taxi, police, delivery service (commercial
service), off-road, desert operation or more
than 50% of your driving is at sustained
high speeds during hot weather, above
90°F (32°C).
XX X X X
Change transfer case fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
Change front and rear axle fluid if using
your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing.
XX X
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about
your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Battery 7 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after
a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
•
Crosshatched zone.
•
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
•
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end
of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
•
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low
end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compart-
ment. Be sure to check the fluid level at regular inter-
vals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent
only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer
fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a
cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will
help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets
or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam-
mable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be
exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free bat-
tery. You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immedi-
ately with large amounts of water.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
•
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main and
the supplemental batteries must be disconnected
to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical
system.
•
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
8
CAUTION!
•
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main and
the supplemental batteries must be disconnected
to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical
system.
•
If the negative battery cables are not isolated prop-
erly it can cause a potential power spike or surge
in the system, resulting in damage to essential
electrical components.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts
and connections however, the pressures generated
by these machines is such that complete protection
against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
may void your warranty and could result in civil penal-
ties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For the proper engine oil selection page 296.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by
the API. The manufacturer only recommends API trade-
mark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies
0W-40 and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
bers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection
dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered prod-
uct and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filter varies
considerably. We recommend using a Mopar® engine
oil filter, if a Mopar® engine oil filter is unavailable only
use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
performance requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER, FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals see
page 247.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” mainte-
nance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is neces-
sary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before starting
the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
•
All air entering the engine intake must be filtered.
The abrasive particles in unfiltered air will cause
rapid wear to engine components.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Many aftermarket performance air filter elements do
not adequately filter the air entering the engine. Use
of such filters can severely damage your engine.
Engine Air Cleaner, Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filter var-
ies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® filters
should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as
shown in the Maintenance Schedule in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air cleaner
filter cover using a suitable tool.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filer cover to access the
engine air cleaner, filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the hous-
ing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing only if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter inspec-
tion surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover fasteners
using a suitable tool.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover
lid screws or damage may result.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Cover
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
8
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT
INSPECTION
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts small cracks,
that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. This is not a reason to replace the
belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across)
are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib
must be replaced. In addition, have the belt replaced if
it has excessive wear, frayed cords, or severe glazing.
Conditions that would require replacement:
•
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
belt body)
•
Rib or belt wear
•
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
•
Belt slips
•
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
•
Belt broken
•
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed.
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle ser-
viced at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a
performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located online, for fur-
ther warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance
with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed
by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG com-
pressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following proce-
dure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. Push up on the glove compartment travel stop and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the
cabin air filter access door to the HVAC housing.
5. Remove the cabin air filter from the HVAC air inlet
housing. Pull the filter elements out pinching them
to the right for clearance.
6. Install the cabin air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indi-
cate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Close cabin air filter access door and secure retain-
ing tabs.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into posi-
tion, ensuring you have properly engaged the travel
dampener.
Glove Compartment Travel Stop
Cabin Air Filter Access Door Retaining Tabs
Cabin Air Filter
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
8
For the proper maintenance intervals see
page 247.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors, and hood hinges should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease,
such as Mopar® Spray White Lube, to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and wear.
Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts con-
cerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit.
After lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant, directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and
a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline,
etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering,
marks, water lines, or wet spots are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
•
Wear or uneven edges
•
Foreign material
•
Hardening or cracking
•
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
press the release tab on the wiper blade, and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Travel Dampener
1 — Travel Dampener Housing
2 — Travel Dampener Rod
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper
arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of
the wiper arm.
3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click.
4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust sys-
tem, or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain car-
bon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odor-
less. Breathing it can make you unconscious and
can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO
see
page 226.
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn, such as grass or
leaves, and those items that come into contact
with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate
your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system
can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy
the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions
control device, may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Con-
tinued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Ser-
vice, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
3 — J Hook Retainer
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
8
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
•
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission
is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
•
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
The fan starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine is running or not.
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to
the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON
position.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an autho-
rized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
(if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from
a garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C con-
denser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connec-
tion at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect
the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM
IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And
Refill
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals see
page 247.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information page 296.
NOTE:
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze), other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or anti-rust products, as they may not be com-
patible with the radiator engine coolant and may
clog the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with pro-
pylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
•
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
ant is needed to be added to the system please con-
tact an authorized dealer.
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important to use the same engine coolant (OAT cool-
ant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant
(antifreeze):
•
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Stan-
dard MS.90032.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
•
Use only high purity water, such as distilled or deion-
ized water, when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
•
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the
vehicle is operated.
•
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
ant is needed to be added to the system, please
contact an authorized dealer.
•
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended
and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
•
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build-up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) OAT or
HOAT, is a regulated substance requiring proper dis-
posal. Check with your local authorities to determine
the disposal rules for your community. To prevent inges-
tion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-
based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills
immediately. If ingested, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine in the off and cold, the level of the engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the
ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there
is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant only needs to be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
8
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•
Check the freezing point of the coolant in the radia-
tor and in the coolant expansion bottle. If deter-
mined that more engine coolant needs to be added
to the radiator, the contents of the coolant expan-
sion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant additions are required,
the cooling system should be pressure tested for
leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a mini-
mum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle over-
flow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. With air condi-
tioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs
may result in unsatisfactory engine system perfor-
mance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 247.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high
brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and pos-
sible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master
Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
Brake System Warning Light is on. If necessary, add
fluid to bring level within the designated marks on the
side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be
sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid
level should be checked when pads are replaced. If the
brake fluid is abnormally low, check the system for
leaks.
For further information
page 297.
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer recommended brake fluid.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its per-
formance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake fail-
ure. This could result in a collision.
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected, inspect the
fluid level.
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm)
below the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
NOTE:
Make sure that the vehicle is level and supported by
the axles.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid
page 297.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill
hole when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals page 247.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid
page 297.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and
a point not more than 3/16 of an inch (4.76 mm) below
the bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with
water, it should be changed immediately. Otherwise,
change the fluid as recommended in the Maintenance
Plan
page 247.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer's recommended manual trans-
mission fluid
page 296.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any special
additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the trans-
mission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Transfer Case
1 — Fill Hole
2 — Drain Hole
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
8
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore
the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use only manufacturer's specified transmission fluid
page 297. It is important to maintain the transmis-
sion fluid at the correct level using the recommended
fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmis-
sion; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than manufacturer’s
recommended fluid may cause deterioration in trans-
mission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder
page 297.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
•
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating
as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with
another fuse of higher amp rating. The use of a
fuse with a rating other than indicated may result
in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any
other material. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in serious personal injury, fire and/or prop-
erty damage.
•
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the igni-
tion is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
•
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering sys-
tem blows, contact an authorized dealer.
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
electrical current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
an extended period of time with the engine off, it may
result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Distribution Center (PDC)
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains
cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and relays. The PDC top
cover is labeled with each serviceable fuse/relay loca-
tion, function, and size.
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it
is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
8
Power Distribution Center Location
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare *
F02 40 Amp Green – Starter
F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F04 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR/FPCM
F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F06 – – Spare *
F07 – – Spare *
F08 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Control Module TCM-8HP CYGNUS
F09 – – Spare *
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Electric Steering Column Lock (ESCL)
F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier
F13 – – Spare *
F14 – – Spare *
F15 – 15 Amp Blue
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Switch Bank-Heavy Duty Electrical
Pkg (SWITCH BANK-HD ELEC)
F16 – – Spare *
F17 – – Spare *
F18 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch (AC CLUTCH)
F19 – – Spare *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS
F21 – – Spare *
F22 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
F23 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module (ECM)
F24 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Power Seat
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F25 – 10 Amp Red Module Shift By Wire (MOD_SBW)
F26 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F28 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER LOCKS
F29 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2
F30 – – Spare *
F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT
F32 – 10 Amp Red
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Mod (HVAC CTRL MOD)/Steering
Column Lock (SCL)/Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/Driver
Presence Detection Module (DPDM)
F33 – 10 Amp Red
ParkTronics System (PTS)/Infrared Camera Module (IRCM)/Airbag
Disable Lamps (AIRBAG DISABLE LMPS)
F34 – 10 Amp Red
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Electric Hydraulic Power Steering
(EHPS)/Smart Bar Control Module (SBCM) WAKE UP
F35 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP *
F36 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Elec Brk Mod *
F37 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW CONN 7W *
F38 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module (ECM)
F39 – – Spare *
F40 – 15 Amp Blue Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)/Axle Lock (AXLE LOC) FT_RR
F41 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster (IC)/Security GateWay (SGW) WAKE UP
F42 – 10 Amp Red Power Control Relay Control Feed (Electric Stop/Start) *
F43 – – Spare *
F44 – 10 Amp Red Infrared Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS
F45 – – Spare *
F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD/LVL MTR/HDLP SW
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F47 – – Spare *
F48 – – Spare *
F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC *
F51 – 10 Amp Red
Humidity Light Rain Sensor (HLRS)/Inverter 400W Wake Up/USB/
InSide RearView Mirror (ISRVM)/Compass Module (CSGM)/DTV
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F53 – 10 Amp Red Wireless Speaker *
F54 – – Spare *
F55 – 10 Amp Red Central Vision Processing Module (CVPM) *
F56 – 10 Amp Red In-Car Temp Sensor/PTC Heater Coil Feed
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Frt Drvr Htd Seat
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Frt Pass Htd Seat
F59 30 Amp Pink – Driver Power Seat
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Comfort Steering Wheel Module (CSWM) (HTD STR WHEEL)
F61 – 10 Amp Red Left Blind Spot Sensor (LBSS)/Right Blind Spot Sensor (RBSS)
F62 – – Spare *
F63 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F64 – – Spare *
F65 50 Amp Red – Power Inverter 400W *
F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLOWER MTR FRT
F67 – – Spare *
F68 – – Spare *
F69 – 10 Amp Red KIN/RF HUB
F70 – 25 Amp Clear INJ/IGN COIL
F71 – – Spare *
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG *
F73 – – Spare *
F74 – – Spare *
F75 – – Spare *
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F77 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
F78 – – Spare *
F79 – 20 Amp Yellow SMART BAR CTRL MOD
F80 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Solenoid12BlockShift
F81 30 Amp Pink – REAR DEFROSTER (EBL)
F82 – – Spare *
F83 – – Spare *
F84 – – Spare *
F85 – – Spare *
F86 – – Spare *
F87 – – Spare *
F88 – – Spare *
F89 – 10 Amp Red
Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)/Cruise Control (CRUISE
CTL)/Digital TV (DTV)/Airbag Disable Lamp
F90 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW PARK LMP *
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2 *
F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1 *
F94 – 10 Amp Red Dual USB Port
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F95 – – Spare *
F96 – 10 Amp Red PWR MIRROR SW
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow RADIO
F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD
F99 – – Spare *
F100 30 Amp Pink – ESC-ECU & VALVES
F101 30 Amp Pink – Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)
F102 – 15 Amp Blue TBM2/Mod_DCSD
F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3 *
F104 – 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Switch (Driver/Passenger)
F105 – 10 Amp Red
Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning
(HVAC)
F106 50 Amp Red – Electronic Speed Control (ESC)/PUMP MTR
F107 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN LT *
F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4 *
F109 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RT *
F110 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 150W *
F111 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW BACKUP *
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
8
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658
Heater Control Lamps 194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger) **
Soundbar Dome Lamp 912
** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamps H13
Premium Head Lamps LED
Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps 7442NALL
Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps LED
Base (Overland/Rubicon) Turn Lamp 7440NA
Base (Overland/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp 7443
Front Side Marker Lamps LED
Base Fog Lamps PSX24W
Premium Fog Lamps LED
Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps LED
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb 3157
Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb 7440
Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker LED
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED
License Lamp LED
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer to the applicable
Service Manual.
Bulb Replacement
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric con-
ditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions occur to allow the condensation to change back
into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually acceler-
ate the clearing process.
HALOGEN HEADLAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the
top a quarter turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away, starting at one
side and working toward the other.
4. Remove the three screws holding the headlamp to
the vehicle.
5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
7. Grab the bulb and turn a quarter turn
counterclockwise.
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock position.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the
connector locking tab to the lock position.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb a quarter
turn clockwise.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil con-
tamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb
comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcohol.
NOTE:
We recommend seeing an authorized dealer for service.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
8
FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access
bulb sockets.
2. Turn the socket assembly a quarter turn counter-
clockwise and remove from housing. Pull the bulb
straight from the socket to replace.
NOTE:
We recommend seeing an authorized dealer for service.
LED FRONT SIDE MARKER
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access
side maker screw and electrical connector.
2.
Remove fastening screw in the back of the front side
maker assembly and disconnect electrical connector.
3. Remove and replace LED front side marker light
assembly.
FRONT FOG LAMP — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the
front fog lamp.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the
front fog lamp connector receptacle.
3. Firmly grab the bulb by the two latch features and
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the
back of the front fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing and then connect the replacement
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil con-
tamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb
comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcohol.
LED Front Fog Lamp
If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps they are
replaced as an assembly.
NOTE:
We recommend seeing an authorized dealer for service.
REAR TAIL, STOP, TURN SIGNAL, AND
BACKUP LAMP — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed
sheet metal.
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward, far
enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the out-
board side of the lamp housing, from the two plastic
snap post retainers in the outer box side panel.
3. Once removed, locate and rotate the appropriate
socket a quarter turn counterclockwise, then
remove it from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.
5. To install a new bulb, reverse the procedure above.
Wheel Liner
Tail Lamp Screws
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
•
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean
the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
•
Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the
socket or the lamp wiring.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP
(CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on the tailgate. If service is
needed, obtain the LED assembly from an authorized
dealer.
LICENSE PLATE LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
To install a new bulb, reverse the procedure above.
When installing the new bulb, care should be taken to
not allow bare skin to come in contact with the bulb.
See an authorized dealer to replace LED lamps.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the follow-
ing information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Num-
bers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures,
and Tire Loading.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with bead-lock wheels,
please refer to your vehicles bead-lock specific part
number for additional information and instructions on
mopar.com or by contacting an authorized dealer.
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter “P” is absent from
this tire size designation. Example:
215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre-
ceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
8
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire, or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
•
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
•
"R" means radial construction, or
•
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
•
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
•
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
•
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
•
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
•
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equip-
ment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
8
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if
you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold
tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire And Load-
ing Information Placard
page 151.
NOTE:
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, see
page 151.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lbs passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
•
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
8
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
•
Safety
•
Fuel Economy
•
Tread Wear
•
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
•
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
•
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
•
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated.
•
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C), and
the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C), then the cold
tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi
(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
pressure build-up or your tire pressure will be too low.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
8
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe oper-
ating speeds, loading, and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires
could cause them to fail. You could have a serious
collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maxi-
mum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
•
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
•
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
•
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
If equipped with Run Flat tires, and they are damaged,
or experience a loss of pressure, they should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of iden-
tical size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as
well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of infla-
tion pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to
as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when
the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96
kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it
has limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
When a Run Flat tire is changed after being driven in a
Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please
replace the TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be
reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle
on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h), or for longer than 30 seconds continuously
without stopping.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds con-
tinuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying fac-
tors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure — Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop
across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns
will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier
tire replacement
•
Distance driven
•
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality, and performance
when replacement is needed
page 281. Refer to
the Tire And Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart found in the “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire
page 274.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in seri-
ous injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capac-
ity, other than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
Tire Tread
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
8
WARNING!
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can
be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation
on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry con-
ditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware, these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C),
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more infor-
mation, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
be identified by a “mountain/snowflake”
symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires that are equivalent in
size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h), refer to original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire desig-
nated for temporary emergency use
page 156.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equip-
ment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of
your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. Refer to an authorized tire
dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the let-
ter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a con-
ventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire
and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same
as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driv-
er’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equip-
ment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on
your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of
vehicle control.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their
luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
same soap solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle, and remember to always wash when the sur-
faces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and auto-
matic car washes may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels, including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of
tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to
prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treat-
ment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner, or their equivalent, is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
8
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow
traction devices are recommended. Follow these rec-
ommendations to guard against damage:
•
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the snow traction device
manufacturer.
•
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with
the snow traction device.
•
Please follow the table below for the recommended
tire size, axle and snow traction device:
Trim Level 4x4 Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Pro-
jection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
SPORT
REAR
245/75R17 S Class AutoSock
LT255/75R17C
275/55R20
AutoSock
OVERLAND 275/70R18
MOJAVE
LT285/70R17C
255/70R18
275/55R20
RUBICON
SUMMIT
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredict-
able handling. You could lose control and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
•
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components,
it is important that only traction devices in good
condition are used. Broken devices can cause seri-
ous damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
•
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require retightening.
•
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
•
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation, operat-
ing speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
•
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare
tire.
TIRE ROTATION
RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate
at different loads and perform different steering, han-
dling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they
wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute
to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 247.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on
each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule
should be followed to balance tire wear.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must con-
form to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
8
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart signifi-
cantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and
climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on speci-
fied government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tem-
perature can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure. The grade C corresponds to a level
of performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Exces-
sive speed, under-inflation, or exces-
sive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat build-up
and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving
fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadver-
tent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
(Continued)
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
•
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main and
the supplemental batteries must be disconnected
to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical
system.
•
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If the negative battery cables are not isolated prop-
erly it can cause a potential power spike or surge in
the system, resulting in damage to essential electrical
components.
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 3 weeks,
we recommend that you take the following steps to
minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
•
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start system
then disconnect both the main and supplemental
negative battery cables.
•
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of ser-
vice (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system
is started again.
•
If assistance is needed to disconnect the battery
system, see an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
•
You must isolate the supplemental battery connec-
tion point, as well as the main battery terminal from
the post, as shown in the image, to fully de-energize
both batteries for storage. If assistance is needed to
disconnect the battery system, see an authorized
dealer.
•
Do not disconnect the Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS), or your Stop/Start system may not function for
up to 24 hours, due to the IBS being set into learn
mode.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other sea-
sons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather, and other
extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint,
metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corro-
sion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Battery Cable Disconnect
1 — Supplemental Negative Battery Cable
2 — Main Negative Battery Cable
3 — Main Negative Battery Terminal
4 — Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
8
BODY AND UNDERBODY
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and there-
fore different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool, or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely
with water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accu-
mulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen
Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax, to remove road film and stains, and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials,
such as steel wool or scouring powder, that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept
clear and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or simi-
lar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as
possible.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-
ers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials
are well packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's interior
trim and top, follow these precautions:
•
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build-up may
result.
•
Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top
down, as exposure to sun or rain may damage inte-
rior trim.
•
Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on
top material, as damage may result.
•
Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry
on the paint, leaving a streak.
•
After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top, always make
sure it is completely dry before lowering.
•
Be especially careful when washing the windows by
following the directions for “Care of Fabric Top
Windows.”
Washing – Use Mopar® Car Wash or equivalent, or
mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with soft
bristles. If extra cleaning is required, use Mopar® Con-
vertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foam-
ing cleaner on the entire top, but support the top from
underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by
rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember
to allow the top to dry before lowering it.
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains, or mildew of the top material:
•
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build-up may
result.
•
It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet may
allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
•
Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
•
Careless handling and storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
•
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
•
Avoid (if at all possible) parking the vehicle under
trees; remove vegetable resins immediately as,
when dried, it may only be possible to remove
them with abrasive products and/or polishes,
which is highly inadvisable as they could alter the
typical opaqueness of the paint.
•
Do not use pure windshield washer fluid for clean-
ing the front windshield and rear window; dilute it
to a minimum of 50% water. Only use pure wind-
shield washer fluid when strictly necessary due to
outside temperature conditions.
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
Your vehicle's fabric top has pliable plastic windows
that can be scratched unless special care is taken by
following these directions:
•
Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead, use a
microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with
cold or warm, clean water, and wipe across the win-
dow, not up and down. Mopar® Jeep® Soft Glass
Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all
the plastic windows without scratching. It removes
fine scratches to improve visibility and provides UV
protection to help prevent yellowing.
•
When washing, never use hot water or anything
stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such
as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.
•
Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe
with a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.
•
When removing frost, snow, or ice, never use a
scraper or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only
if you must clean the window quickly.
•
Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road
driving will have an impact on plastic retainer opera-
tion. Even normal on-road driving and vehicle wash-
ing will eventually impact window plastic retainer
operation. To maintain ease of use of the window
plastic retainers, each window plastic retainer
should be cleaned and lubricated regularly. Clean
them with a mild soap solution and a small brush.
Cleaning products are available through an autho-
rized dealer.
•
Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to
the windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may
damage the windows.
INTERIORS
CARPET SAFETY INFORMATION
Always use carpet designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
carpet that does not interfere with the operation of the
pedal assemblies. Only operate the vehicle when the
carpet is securely attached by the grommets so it can-
not slip out of position and interfere with the pedal
assemblies or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
WARNING!
•
If operating the vehicle without carpet in place the
floor may become hot, and there is a risk of burns.
•
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or dam-
aged grommets may cause your carpet to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERI-
OUS INJURY or DEATH: ALWAYS securely attach
your carpet using the grommets.
•
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
•
NEVER place any objects under the carpet (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the carpet and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
8
WARNING!
•
ONLY install carpet designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install carpet that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If the carpet
needs to be replaced, only use manufacturer
approved carpet for the specific make, model, and
year of your vehicle.
•
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the
floor and check that the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each
pedal to check for interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
CARPET REMOVAL
Front Carpets:
1. Remove the front grommets.
2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat. First for
the rear carpet and then the front carpet.
4. Under the back of the front seat, open the carpet
split and then pull out the rear edge and slide the
carpet to the front (do not remove the harness).
5. Finally open the carpet split around seat bracket
and then remove the last two grommets.
6. When reinstalling carpet, perform these steps in
reverse order, making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B-pillar, and console, and then
refasten the grommets.
Front Carpet
1—Grommets
Front Carpet Pulled Away
Front And Rear Carpet Split
Rear Underside Of Front Seat Carpet Split
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Carpet
1. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one left
and one right).
2. Then pull the carpet out, to the rear and open the
carpet split around the front seat brackets.
3. Remove the rear Under Seat storage bin
(if equipped), by removing the four bolts that hold it
to the floor.
4. Remove the fastener bin from the rear floor, it is
heldinbyclips.
5. Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then lift
the assembly out from under the seat.
6. Lift carpet off of the rear retainers (one left and one
right).
7. Remove carpet from the vehicle.
8. When reinstalling the carpet, perform these steps in
reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and then refasten
the grommets.
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Pro-
gram facility for inspection.
Carpet Split
Rear Retainers
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
8
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
•
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away
immediately.
•
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regu-
lar cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of
dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar®
Total Clean leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean
the leather seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery,
as damage to the upholstery may result.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the A-pillar,
visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield.
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop,
and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that
required with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 ft-lb
(176 N·m)
M14x1.50mm 22mm
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it halfway).
Vehicle Identification Number
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
293
9
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to
be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the
engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see
an authorized dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with
an octane number lower than recommended can cause
engine failure and may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using high-
quality unleaded regular gasoline having an
octane rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of higher octane premium gasoline
will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner-
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corro-
sion and stability additives are recommended. Using
gasolines that have these additives will help improve
fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to fur-
ther aide in minimizing engine and fuel sys-
tem deposits. When available, the usage of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active sol-
vents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel sys-
tem gasket and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Use of these blends may result in starting and driv-
ability problems, damage critical fuel system compo-
nents, cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as
they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX
FUEL VEHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gaso-
line with higher ethanol content may void the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
•
Operate in a lean mode.
•
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
•
Poor engine performance.
•
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
•
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
294 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
COMPRESSED NATURAL GAS (CNG)
AND LIQUID PROPANE (LP) FUEL
SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on CNG or LP
may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and
fuel system components. Problems that result from
running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT)
IN GASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that
is blended into some gasolines to increase octane.
Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system perfor-
mance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indi-
cated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask
your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal law and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control
system.
•
An out-of-tune engine, certain fuel or ignition mal-
functions can cause the catalytic converter to over-
heat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some
light smoke, your engine may be out-of-tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most
of these products contain high concentrations of
methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of The
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 295
9
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 22.0 gal 83.0 L
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine 5.0 qt 4.7 L
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine 13.0 qt 12.3 L
*Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 3.6L Gasoline Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst
trademark
page 252.
Fuel Selection — 3.6L Gasoline Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease cor-
rosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with
the radiator engine coolant and may clog the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
296 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Use only Mopar® ZF8&9Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle Differential We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API GL-5).
Rear Axle Differential (M220 Sales Codes
DRE/DRF)
We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API GL-5). Models equipped with Trac-Lok Limited Slip
Differential require a friction modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend using Mopar® Electric Steering Pump Fluid.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 297
9
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's ser-
vice history.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements
when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally inter-
ested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with
our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high qual-
ity service. The FCA US LLC authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed cor-
rectly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be
resolved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact a FCA US LLC customer
center.
Any communication to a FCA US LLC customer center
should include the following information:
•
Owner's name and address
•
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
•
Authorized dealer name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside Assis-
tance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on the
odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in
your Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.
Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where ser-
vices are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc.,
Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of
gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing
as a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free:
USA: 1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Pro-
vide your name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
required for covered services, license plate number,
and your location, including the telephone number from
which you are calling. Briefly describe the nature of the
problem and answer a few simple questions. You will be
given the name of the service provider and an esti-
mated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an unsafe
situation, please let us know. With your consent, we will
contact local police or safety authorities.
298
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you
may submit your original receipts from the licensed tow-
ing or service facility, for services rendered
within30 days of the occurrence. Be sure to include
your VIN, odometer mileage at the time of service, and
current mailing address. We will process the claim
based on vehicle and service eligibility. If eligible, we
will reimburse you for the reasonable amount actually
paid, based on the usual and customary charges for
that service in the area where they were provided. FCA
US LLC’s determination relating to reimbursement is
final. Correspondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any
time. The Roadside Assistance program is subject to
restrictions and conditions of use, which are deter-
mined solely by FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch
a service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare
tire (if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s
Manual. This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We
will dispatch a service provider to deliver a small
amount of fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a
nearby station. This service is limited to two occur-
rences in a 12-month period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen
locks are keeping you from getting on your way, help is
just a phone call away. This service is limited to provid-
ing access to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not
cover the cost of replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and confi-
dence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of a
mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will dis-
patch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram
dealer. If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds
10 miles.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER
CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, CDMX
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGIN
ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
HEARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA
US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has
access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC
by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users,
dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 299
10
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans
are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans autho-
rized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If
you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you
will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification
Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle deliv-
ery date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased addi-
tional coverage with an extended service contract. FCA
Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service contracts.
Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine Canada Inc.
service contract. We are not responsible for other com-
panies’ contracts. If you purchased a contract other
than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service contract and
you have a problem, you will have to contact the admin-
istrator of that contract for resolution. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the FCA's Ser-
vice Contract National Customer Hotline at (800) 465-
2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
Mopar Vehicle Protection Plans offer valuable protec-
tion against repair costs after your vehicle warranties
have expired. Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide addi-
tional protection beyond your vehicle's warranty.
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract
you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If
you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools,
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted
with the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
sions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for
further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
sions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/en/
for further information.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for further
information.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep
it operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
WASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or
cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US
LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
vidual problems between you, an
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
Scan me
300 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investi-
gations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
ORDERING AND ACCESSING OWNER’S
INFORMATION
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a com-
plete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or
components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step trouble-
shooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic
tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagnostic Pro-
cedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or visit:
www.techauthority.com to order physical copies of
Owner’s Manuals (US).
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty Infor-
mation Books can be ordered through Archway at:
•
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
changed your address, please provide the following
information and mail to:
FCAUSLLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
•
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
•
Vehicle Identification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
•
Exact Odometer Reading
•
First and Last Name
•
Phone Number
•
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
•
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 301
10
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innova-
tion, Science and Economic Development applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouil-
lage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. Es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. Este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
302 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes.................293
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ..........254
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .135
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze).........259
AddingFuel....................150
Additives,Fuel ..................294
Adventure Guides .................182
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ...............209
Air Bag Warning Light ........105,207,209
Enhanced Accident Response .......216,246
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ..........246
FrontAirBag...............208, 209
If Deployment Occurs .............216
Knee Impact Bolsters .............214
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ........217
Maintenance .................217
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .......207
Transporting Pets ...............227
AirBagLight.................207,227
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)....253
Air Conditioner Maintenance............254
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ..........254, 255
Air Conditioner System ..............254
Air Conditioning Filter .............57,255
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...........57
Air Conditioning System...............56
AirFilter......................253
Air Pressure
Tires .....................279
Alarm
Arm The System ................21
Disarm The System ...............21
Security Alarm .................20
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .....................9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)..........258, 296
Disposal ...................259
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........108,185
Assist, Hill Start ..................189
Audio Systems (Radio) ...............166
AutoDownPowerWindows.............68
AutomaticDimmingMirror .............44
Automatic Door Locks................24
Automatic Headlights ................50
Automatic High Beams ...............49
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ........56
Automatic Transmission ..............122
AddingFluid..................262
Autostick ...................125
Fluid And Filter Change ............262
Fluid Change .................262
Fluid Level Check ............261,262
FluidType ................262, 297
Gear Ranges .................123
Special Additives ...............261
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode .....124
AutoPark.....................116
AUX ........................60
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......65
Auxiliary Power Outlet ................65
Auxiliary Switches..................
67
AxleFluid.....................297
Axle Lock .....................129
B
Battery ......................251
Charging System Light .............106
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ..........16
Bed Lights .....................51
Belts, Seat ....................227
BlindSpotMonitoring...............191
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...........256
B-Pillar Location ..................276
Brake Assist System ................186
Brake Control System ...............186
Brake Fluid .................260, 297
Brake System ................260, 293
Anti-Lock (ABS) ................293
Fluid Check ..................260
Master Cylinder ................260
Parking....................118
Warning Light .................106
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...........122
Bulb Replacement ..............270,271
Bulbs,Light.................228, 270
BumperEndCapRemoval.............160
C
Camera, Rear ...................148
Capacities, Fluid .................296
Caps, Filler
Fuel......................150
Oil (Engine) ..................250
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..........259
Carbon Monoxide Warning ..........228, 229
Carpeting.....................290
Carpet Safety Information .............289
303
11
Car Washes ....................288
Cellular Phone ..................179
Center High Mounted Stop Light ..........273
Certification Label .................151
Chains, Tire ....................284
Chart, Tire Sizing .................274
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety..........226
Checks, Safety ..................226
Child Restraint ..................218
Child Restraints
Booster Seats .................220
Child Seat Installation .............225
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....224
Infant And Child Restraints ...........219
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ........223
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ....221
Older Children And Child Restraints ......219
Seating Positions ...............220
Clean Air Gasoline.................294
Cleaning
Wheels ....................283
Climate Control ...................53
Automatic ...................53
Manual .....................55
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.......295
Cold Weather Operation ..............117
Compact Spare Tire ................282
Connector
UCI.......................60
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .......60
Console ......................58
Floor......................58
Contract, Service .................300
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ........259
Cooling System ..................258
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........259
Coolant Level .................259
Cooling Capacity ...............296
Disposal Of Used Coolant ...........259
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............258
Inspection ................258, 259
PointsToRemember .............260
Pressure Cap .................259
Radiator Cap .................259
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .....258, 296
Corrosion Protection ................287
Cruise Control
(Speed Control) . . .109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 135
Customer Assistance ...............298
Cybersecurity ...................
166
D
Daytime Running Lights ...............49
Defroster, Windshield ...............227
De-Icer, Remote Start ................20
Dimmer Control Switch ...............51
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ....................49
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..................251
Disable Vehicle Towing...............244
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........259
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .....294
Door Ajar Light ..................106
Door Frame.....................87
Installation ...................87
Removal ....................87
Door Locks
Automatic ...................24
Door Off Mirror Kit .................29
Doors .......................21
Removal ..................24,28
Removal,Rear .................28
Doors Removal, Front
.............24
Doors Removal, Rear
.............28
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt..............37,39
Driving......................159
DrivingTips....................159
E
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .......65
Electrical Power Outlets ...............65
Electric Brake Control System ...........186
Anti-Lock Brake System ............185
Electronic Roll Mitigation .........186,191
Electric Remote Mirrors ...............45
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)......136
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .......108,187
Emergency
In Case Of ...................230
SOS Emergency Call ..............230
Emergency Brake .................118
Emergency Braking ................196
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking ....................233
Jump Starting .................240
Tow Hooks ..................245
Engine ......................250
Air Cleaner ..................253
Break-In Recommendations ..........118
Checking Oil Level ...............251
Compartment.................250
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............296
Cooling....................258
Exhaust Gas Caution ...........228, 229
Fails To Start .................117
Flooded, Starting ...............117
Fuel Requirements ..............296
Jump Starting .................240
304 INDEX
Oil....................252, 296
Oil Filler Cap .................250
OilFilter....................253
OilReset ...................101
Oil Selection ...............252, 296
Oil Synthetic .................252
Overheating ..................242
Starting ....................115
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ....216,246
Ethanol ......................294
Exhaust Gas Caution ...............228
Exhaust Gas Cautions ...............229
Exhaust System ...............228, 257
Exterior Lights .................48, 228
F
Fabric Care ....................288
Fabric Top.....................288
Fastener Bin ....................59
Filters
Air Cleaner ..................253
Air Conditioning ..............57,255
Engine Oil ................253, 296
Engine Oil Disposal ..............252
Flashers
Hazard Warning ................230
Turn Signal ..................228
Turn Signals ..................272
Flash-To-Pass....................50
Flooded Engine Starting ..............117
Fluid, Brake ....................297
Fluid Capacities ..................296
Fluid Leaks ....................228
Fluid Level
Manual Transmission .............261
Fluid Level Checks.................261
Brake .....................260
Engine Oil ...................251
Fog Lights ................50,112,272
Fog Lights, Service ................272
Fold-Flat Seats ...................37
Folding Rear Seats .................39
Folding Windshield .................89
Forward Collision Warning ..........111,194
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............230
Four Wheel Drive .................125
Operation ...................125
Shifting....................125
System ....................125
Four Wheel Drive Operation ............127
Freedom Panels ..................82
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..............243
Front Axle (Differential) ..............261
FrontViewCamera ................150
Fuel .......................294
Adding ....................150
Additives ...................294
CleanAir ...................294
Ethanol ....................294
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...........109,150
Gasoline ...................294
Materials Added ................294
Methanol ...................294
Octane Rating ..............294,296
Requirements .................296
Specifications .................296
Tank Capacity .................296
Fueling......................150
Fuel System Cautions ...............295
Fuses.......................262
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..........45
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...........150,151
Gasoline, Clean Air ................294
Gasoline, (Fuel) ..................294
Gasoline, Reformulated ..............294
Gear Ranges.................120, 123
Glass Cleaning ..................292
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .........152,153
GVWR.......................151
H
Half-Door Installation ................31
Half-Doors If Equipped
............31
Hard Top
...................69
Hazard Warning Flashers .............230
Headlights
Automatic ...................50
Bulb Replacement ...............271
Cleaning ...................288
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ......49
Lights On Reminder ............50, 112
Passing ....................50
Replacing...................271
Switch.....................48
Head Restraints ..................42
Heated Mirrors ...................45
Heated Seats ....................41
Heated Steering Wheel ...............36
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . .49
Hill Start Assist ..................189
Hitches
TrailerTowing.................154
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ..........45
Hood Prop .....................91
Hood Release ...................91
INDEX 305
11
I
Ignition.......................17
Switch .....................17
IgnitionParkInterlock...............122
In Case Of Emergency ...............230
InsideRearviewMirror...............44
Instrument Cluster
Audio.....................103
Display ....................100
Driver Assist ..................103
Engine Oil Reset ................101
Fuel Economy .................103
OffRoad ...................102
Screen Setup .................104
Speedometer .................102
Stop Start ...................103
Stored Messages ...............104
Trip......................103
VehicleInfo..................102
Instrument Clusters
..............99
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ..........292
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) .........263
Interior And Instrument Lights ............51
Interior Appearance Care .............289
Interior Lights....................51
Inverter
Power .....................66
J
Jacking And Tire Changing ..........233
Jacking Instructions ................236
Jack Location ...................233
Jack Operation ..................236
Jeep Wireless Speaker .............61,64
Charging ....................62
Location ....................62
Pairing.....................63
Resetting....................63
Speakerphone .................63
Waterproof Features ..............64
Jump Starting ...................240
K
KeyFob ......................15
Arm The System ................21
Disarm The System ...............21
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........17
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .16
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ....17
KeylessEnter'nGo™................22
Passive Entry ..................22
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Passive Entry
.......22
Keys........................15
Replacement ..................17
L
Lane Change Assist.................50
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................202
Latches ......................228
Hood ......................91
Leaks, Fluid ....................228
Leather Surfaces .................292
LifeOfTires....................281
LightBulbs..................228, 270
Lights.......................228
4WD .....................110
4WDAuto...................111
4WDLow...................111
4WDPartTime ................111
AirBag...............105,207,227
Automatic Headlights ..............50
Axle Locker Fault ...............111
Bed ......................51
Brake Assist Warning .............188
Brake Warning ................106
Bulb Replacement ...............271
Cargo .....................111
Center Mounted Stop .............273
Daytime Running ................49
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ............49
Electronic Throttle Control ...........106
Engine Check Malfunction Indicator ......109
Engine Coolant Temperature ..........107
Exterior..................48, 228
Fog .................50,112,272
Front And Rear Axle Lock ...........111
Hazard Warning Flasher ............230
Headlights .................48, 271
Headlight Switch ................48
High Beam ................49, 113
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..........49
Hood Open ..................107
Instrument Cluster ...............48
Interior.....................51
Lights On Reminder ...............50
LowFuel ...................109
Neutral ....................111
OffRoad ...................111
Oil Pressure ..................107
Oil Temperature ................107
Passing ....................50
Rear Axle Lock ................111
RearServicing.................272
RearTailLamps................272
Seat Belt Reminder ..............107
Security Alarm .................108
Service ....................271
Service4WD .................109
Service Forward Collision ...........109
306 INDEX
SideMarker..................272
StopStart ...................112
SwayBarFault ................110
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .....110,197
Traction Control ................188
Transmission Temperature ...........107
Turn Signal ..................228
Turn Signals ...............112,272
Two Wheel Drive High .............112
Loading Vehicle ..................151
Tires .....................276
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ..........104
Locking
Axle......................129
Locks
Automatic Door .................24
Child Protection .................24
Power Door ...................22
Low Tire Pressure System .............197
Lubrication, Body .................256
Luggage Carrier...................97
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..................293
M
Maintenance Free Battery .............251
Maintenance Schedule ..............247
Manual
Park Release .................242
Service....................301
Manual Transmission.............119,261
Fluid Level Check ...............261
Lubricant Selection ............261,297
Shift Speeds .................120
Methanol .....................294
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline .........295
Mirrors.......................44
AutomaticDimming...............44
Electric Powered ................45
Electric Remote .................45
Heated .....................45
Outside ....................44
Rearview....................44
Vanity .....................44
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .....................9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...........197
Mopar Parts ...................300
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ............118
O
Occupant Restraints................200
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ........294,296
Off Road+.....................131
Off Road Pages ..................179
Accessory Gauges ............179,180
Drivetrain ................179,180
PitchAndRoll ..............179,180
Status Bar ...................179
Oil, Engine ..................252, 296
Capacity ...................296
Checking ...................251
Dipstick ....................251
Disposal ...................252
Filter ..................253, 296
Filter Disposal .................252
Identification Logo ...............252
Materials Added To ..............252
Recommendation ............252, 296
Synthetic ...................252
Viscosity ...................296
Oil Filter, Change .................253
Oil Filter, Selection ................253
Oil Life Reset If Equipped
...........101
OilReset.....................101
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ................301
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..............44
P
Paint Care ....................287
Parking Brake ...................118
ParkSense
FrontAndRear ................144
ParkSense System, Rear..............144
Passive Entry ....................22
Pedestrian Warning System ............196
Pets .......................227
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......276
Power
Brakes ....................293
Door Locks ...................22
Inverter.....................66
Mirrors.....................45
Seats ......................37
Steering ....................131
Windows....................68
Power Steering Fluid................297
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts..........205
Preparation For Jacking ..............233
Pressure Washing .................252
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...................205
INDEX 307
11
R
Radial Ply Tires ..................280
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)........259
Radio Operation ..................179
Radio Remote Controls ..............179
Rear Axle (Differential)...............261
RearCamera...................148
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails.............94
RearCrossPath..................193
Rear ParkSense System ..............144
Rear Seats, Stadium Position ............40
Recreational Towing ................158
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....159
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ....159
Reformulated Gasoline ..............294
Refrigerant ....................255
Release, Hood ...................91
Reminder, Seat Belt ................201
Remote Control
Starting System .................19
Remote Keyless Entry
ArmTheAlarm .................21
Disarm The Alarm ................21
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........17
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .......179
Remote Start (Gas) .................19
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .............19
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . .20
Uconnect Settings ...............20
Remote Starting System ..............19
Removable Doors ................24,28
Front......................24
Rear......................28
Removing The Hard Top
............83
Removing The Soft Top
.............78
Replacement Bulbs ................270
Replacement Keys .................17
Replacement Tires ................281
Reporting Safety Defects .............300
Restraints, Child..................218
Restraints, Head ..................42
Roll Over Warning ..................8
Roof Type Carrier ..................97
Rotation, Tires ..................285
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle............227
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...........228
Safety Defects, Reporting .............300
Safety, Exhaust Gas ................228
SafetyInformation,Tire..............273
SafetyTips....................226
Schedule, Maintenance ..............247
Seat Belt Reminder ................107
Seat Belts ..................201,227
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ............204
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .....204
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .204
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .......205
Child Restraints ................218
Extender ...................204
Front Seat .............201,202, 203
Inspection ...................227
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .........203
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..............202
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .........204
Operating Instructions .............203
Pregnant Women ...............205
Pretensioners .................205
Rear Seat ...................202
Reminder ...........107,112,113,201
Seat Belt Extender ..............204
Seat Belt Pretensioner .............205
Untwisting Procedure .............204
Seat Belts Maintenance ..............291
Seats........................37
Adjustment ...................37
Heated .....................41
Height Adjustment ...............38
Lumbar Adjustment ...............38
Power .....................37
Rear Folding ..................37
Tilting .....................37
Security Alarm ...................20
Arm The System ................21
Disarm The System ...............21
Selec - Speed Control ............113,189
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........296
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..............17
Sentry Key Replacement ..............17
Service Assistance ................298
Service Contract .................300
Service Manuals .................301
Shifting......................121
Automatic Transmission .........121,122
Manual Transmission .............119
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) .............111,159
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) .............
111,159
Shoulder Belts ..................202
SideStepRemoval ................160
Signals, Turn .................228, 272
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............284
SnowTires....................282
SoftTop....................69,75
Soft Top Windows
...............75
Spare Tires ...............235, 282, 283
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ................296
308 INDEX
Oil ......................296
Speed Control
Cancel ....................137
Resume ....................137
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...........136
Starting ......................115
Automatic Transmission ............115
Button .....................17
Cold Weather .................117
Engine Fails To Start ..............117
Manual Transmission .............115
Remote ....................19
Starting And Operating ..............115
Starting Procedures ................115
Steering ......................36
Power ..................106,131
TiltColumn...................36
Wheel, Heated .................36
Wheel, Tilt ...................36
Steering Wheel
Voice Recognition ................43
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...........179
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls ................179
Stop/Start.............109,112,132,134
Storage ....................58, 75
Behind Rear Seat ................59
Storage, Vehicle ................57,286
StoringYourVehicle................286
Stuck, Freeing...................243
Sunrider® For Hard Top...............85
Sway Bar Disconnect
Electronic ................111,130
Sway Control, Trailer ................191
Synthetic Engine Oil ................252
System, Remote Starting ..............19
T
Tailgate ......................92
Telescoping Steering Column ............36
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........56
Three-Position Tailgate ...............92
Tilt Steering Column ................36
Tire And Loading Information Placard........276
TireMarkings...................273
Tires ...............228, 279, 282, 285
Aging (Life Of Tires) ..............281
Air Pressure ..................279
Chains ....................284
Changing ...................233
Compact Spare ................282
General Information ...........279,282
High Speed ..................280
Inflation Pressure ...............279
LifeOfTires..................281
Load Capacity .................276
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....110,197
Quality Grading ................285
Radial ....................280
Replacement .................281
Rotation ...................285
Safety..................273,279
Sizes .....................274
SnowTires ..................282
Spare Tires .............235, 282, 283
Spinning ...................280
Tread Wear Indicators .............281
Wheel Nut Torque ...............293
TireSafetyInformation ..............273
Tire Types .....................282
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...........155
Tonneau Cover ...................94
Install .....................94
Removal....................96
To Open Hood ...................91
Top
Dual ......................69
Hard......................69
Removable...................69
Soft ......................69
Tow Hooks
Emergency ..................245
Towing.................152,155,244
Disabled Vehicle ................244
Recreational .................158
Weight ....................155
Towing Behind A Motorhome............158
TowingTips....................157
Trac-Lok
RearAxle...................129
Traction Control ..................191
TrailCam System .................150
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............191
TrailerTowing...................152
Hitches ....................154
Minimum Requirements ............155
Trailer And Tongue Weight ...........155
Wiring.....................156
TrailerTowingGuide................155
TrailerWeight...................155
Trail Recording ..................181
Transfer Case ...................261
Fluid .....................297
Four-Wheel-Drive-Operation ........125, 127
Maintenance
.................261
T
ransmission ...................122
Automatic ................122, 261
Fluid .....................297
Maintenance .................261
Manual....................119
Shifting....................121
Transporting Pets .................227
INDEX 309
11
Tread Wear Indicators ...............281
Turn Signals .................112,272
U
UCI Connector ...................60
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings .............20, 166
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features .....20, 22
Passive Entry Programming ...........22
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ............285
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector ....60
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
. .45
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..........204
USB........................60
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ............94
V
VanityMirrors ...................44
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........293
Vehicle Loading ...............151,276
Vehicle Maintenance ...............252
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...........9
Vehicle Storage ................57,286
VoiceCommand..................43
Voice Recognition System (VR) .........43, 57
W
Warnings, Roll Over .................8
Warranty Information
.............300
Washers, Windshield ...............251
Washing Vehicle..................288
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ............283
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ............283
WindBuffeting...................69
Window Fogging ..................57
Window Lockout Switch ...............69
Windows......................68
Power .....................68
RearSliding ..................69
Window Storage ..................75
Windshield
Folding.....................89
Windshield Defroster ...............227
Windshield Washers ..............52,251
Fluid...................109,251
Windshield Wiper Blades .............256
Windshield Wipers .................52
Wipers Blade Replacement ............256
310 INDEX
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices,
such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 or by
contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement
kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink
and then drive.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and
equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also
include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described
in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make
changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to
its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products
previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed
to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of
your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals
and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
Vehicle images are for illustration purposes only. Actual products sold may vary.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE. CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT
CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM
(CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance,
Lockout Service and Towing Service
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The
Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
2024 GLADIATOR
OWNER’S MANUAL
First Edition
24_JT_OM_EN_USC
©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD THE MOST
UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S
MANUAL, RADIO AND
WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
Canada
U.S.
mopar.com/om
The Jeep app puts the latest in connectivity and convenience in the palm of your hand. The App provides access to your remote vehicle commands
(if properly equipped), service history, My Garage and the Digital Glovebox. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store
and enter the search keyword “Jeep” (U.S. residents only).
2024 GLADIATOR
